JP6952323B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There is a proposal for a gaming machine that can reliably reproduce the gaming operation before the power is cut off even if the power supply voltage is unstable when the power is turned on or restored .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-237233

However, one of the factors that makes the power supply voltage unstable is the gaming machine environment. Depending on the gaming machine environment, since the power supply voltage continues to be unstable, the gaming control raised by the reset signal may be interrupted by the reset signal again .

On one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stably continuing gaming control after the power is turned on.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a production unit and a control unit. The production department directs the game. Control unit, the second of the power-on resetting the game state before the first power-on and power-off can be restored to the playing state before power-off, after the recovery when detecting the first power-on When the effect unit is controlled by setting the effect mode in the gaming state to the first restricted effect mode in which the power consumption is limited compared to the effect mode in the game state before the power is cut off , and the second power on is detected, the first restricted effect mode is used. The effect unit is controlled in the second restricted effect mode in which the power consumption is limited.

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, the gaming control after the power is turned on can be stably continued .

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the checksum calculation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the initial value random number update processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch reading process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of fraud & prize winning monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning number counter update processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port switch common processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. The special figure of the 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process while opening the big prize opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during opening of a big winning opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit fanfare process in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit middle processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit middle processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end processing of 1st Embodiment. The special figure of 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 3. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol variation control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2-byte distribution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general drawing game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the Fukuden winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the change of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the processing during display of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process in the middle of a normal drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary fluctuation winning apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric residual sphere processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end processing per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the segment LED editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point control processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point initialization processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point update process in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the point table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the point indicator of the point cumulative value update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point exchange process in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection operation screen of the privilege to be displayed on the display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (modification example 1) of the point table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (modification example 2) of the point table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (modification example 3) of the privilege selection operation screen to be displayed on the display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the variable display middle screen to be displayed on the display device of 7th Embodiment, and the display example of a point display. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows the variable display middle screen to be displayed on the display device of 7th Embodiment, and the display example of a point display. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the variable display middle screen to be displayed on the display device of 7th Embodiment, and the display example of a point display. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the variable display middle screen to be displayed on the display device of 7th Embodiment, and the display example of a point display. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the special symbol of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the point control processing in the effect control apparatus of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2nd point exchange process in the effect control apparatus of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the winning opening and the like in the gaming machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the model specification system command list of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display device of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold notice effect area of the event trigger in the display device of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the lighting mode of the indicator lamp, and the degree of expectation in the general prize opening notice display effect of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the 1st notice display effect of 8th Embodiment. In the second notice display effect of the eighth embodiment, (1) an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation, (2) an example of the display position in the hold notice effect area, and (3) an example of a change in the display mode. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the 3rd notice display effect of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement display mode and the notification target guidance in the 3rd notice display effect of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the final notice display effect of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold notice effect area of a timer trigger in the display device of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the display mode of a character, and the degree of expectation in the timer notice display effect of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the relationship between the general winning opening A winning and the hold notice effect of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hold effect setting process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hold effect selection process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of lighting mode of the indicator lamp and 1st notice display effect connection condition in the general prize opening notice display effect of the modification 1 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold notice display effect frequency adjustment table which defines the execution frequency of the hold notice effect of the modification 2 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the relationship between the general winning opening A winning and the hold notice effect of the modification 3 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the production part in the gaming machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the light emitting part in the option setting part of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the voltage waveform of the various voltage generated by the power supply device at the time of power-on of the 9th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific circuit structure in the power supply device of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power consumption limit processing at the time of power-on of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the power consumption limiting condition of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode for each limit strength in the sound output part of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output timing for each restriction mode in the speaker at the time of power-on of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output timing for each restriction mode in the sound output channel at the time of power-on of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode for each limit intensity in the light emitting part of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission timing for each restriction mode in the light emitting part at the time of power-on of the 9th Embodiment and for each monochromatic LED. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emitting timing of the monochromatic LED for each light emitting group in the strong restriction mode in the light emitting part at the time of power-on of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode for each limit strength in the display part of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emitting timing for each light emitting group in the display part at the time of power-on of the 9th Embodiment, and for each limiting mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode for each limit strength in the movable part of the 9th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the power switch and the initialization switch of the gaming machine of tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the position guidance of the initialization switch of the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the power switch and the initialization switch of the gaming machine of the modification 1 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the power switch and the initialization switch of the gaming machine of the modification 2 of the tenth embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example,). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, an option setting unit 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect in which the player's operation is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the game machine 10 is the display device. It is possible to operate the character displayed on the 41 and stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, that is, below the starting gate 34 of the normal drawing, and one general winning opening is located on the lower right side of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start port distribution device 36 (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. ing. The start port distribution device 36 has a start port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3), a start port 2 switch 37d (see FIG. 3), and a distribution mechanism, and includes a start port 1 switch 36a and a start port 2 switch 37d. The game balls are distributed and guided alternately for each ball. Therefore, the game ball that has won the starting port distribution device 36 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37d.

Further, on the lower left side of the starting port distribution device 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the normal drawing start gate 34, the game ball is converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A possible special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The special variable winning device 38 has a single-blade type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the left side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the big winning opening is changed from the closed state (unfavorable state for the player) to the open state (advantageous state for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is provided in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp opening 39a under the special variable winning device 38. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port (warp inlet) 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located directly above the start port distribution device 36, and the game ball guided to the warp outlet 39b can easily win a prize in the start port distribution device 36.

Further, a point gate 48 and a point display 49 are arranged on the lower right side of the start port distribution device 36 in the game area 32. Since the point gate 48 is provided in the vicinity of the start port distribution device 36, the gaming machine 10 simultaneously plays a game in which a prize is generated in the start port distribution device 36 and a prize is generated in the point gate 48. Can be observed by a person. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the interest of the game by winning the point gate 48 even when the winning of the starting port distribution device 36 is sparse. The interest of the game by winning the point gate 48 in this way contributes to the reduction of the player's feeling of loss and discomfort due to the lack of prizes in the starting port sorting device 36, and continues to the player. It can give motivation to play a game.

In addition, the point gate 48 is provided at a position where there is no other chance to win a prize. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the chance of winning the point gate 48. The game ball that has won the point gate 48 is detected by the point switch 48a (see FIG. 4). The point display 49 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and numerically displays the cumulative value of the number of points given upon the winning detection (passage detection) of the point gate 48 in two digits. The cumulative value of the number of points is exchanged for a privilege at a predetermined opportunity and given to the player. As for the privilege given according to the cumulative value of the number of points, for example, there is an increase in the choices of the production mode. The player can select a desired effect mode by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting mouth distribution device 36, the normal drawing starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device are used. It is possible to aim for a prize in 38, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), it is not possible to aim for any prize.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and the pachinko and pachislot machine 10 is moved to the right gaming region. The game ball launched with the above is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a general drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120, and an output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like that generate a clock. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of direct current voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400. To be operational.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. A normal power supply unit 410 having a power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure in the game control device 100. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like for generating and outputting control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the above are provided.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , It may be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for the solenoid or the display device to output the game machine 10. Take control of the whole. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10, a start port 1 switch 36a in the start port distribution device 36, and a start port 2 in the normal variable winning device 37. The switches 37a and 37d are connected to the gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is low. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as 7V is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a and the abnormality of the sensor or switch are detected. The abnormality detection signal 1 output at this time is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 (changes to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. By doing so, it can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the original signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. There is.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a large winning opening solenoid 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, and a general electric solenoid 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can hold stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A Fe RAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 is connected to an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. Has been done.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for the purpose are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a point display 49. , A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, an effect switch 47 that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. (Effect motor switch), a function of detecting the on / off state of the point switch 48a provided in the point gate 48 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like. And put them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55, and then the normal symbol variation display game for which the identification symbol (identification information) is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting port distribution device 36, and the first special figure variation display is performed based on this starting memory. A random value for determining the jackpot of the game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit or miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37 and the start port 2 switch 37d provided in the start port distribution device 36. Based on the start memory, a random value for determining the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed. ..

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is performed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting port distribution device 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It serves as a control means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. Control the door. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. One round is set to open, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure change display game and the second special figure. Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, The opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2), and the opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) of the third stop symbol. 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power release number, and the normal power release time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal figure, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The batch display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting modes of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LEDs_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 allocates various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the normal symbol symbol display unit 55, the normal figure hold display unit 56, the state display unit 57, and the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbol in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d1. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game according to the lighting modes of the three LEDs, LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that serves as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Next, after performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". (Step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time ends, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C or EEPROM that can be read and written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). From the state of the first input port 122 read earlier, it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16).

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step). S17) If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether or not the checksums of are matched (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). ), If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50. The on (lighting) data of the device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command (a command on the customer waiting demo screen if waiting for a customer, Otherwise, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

On the other hand, when the transition from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined value is set. A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and a timer interrupt signal. It includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the winning symbol of the special figure is determined. RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random number to be performed (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number) After saving in the predetermined area of (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. ), The regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by "+1" or "-1", or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the checksum calculation process of the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S103).

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S107). If the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the initial value random number update process of the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is "+1". (Step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that becomes. The small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing in the above-mentioned main processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S121). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S123) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process (step S124) for controlling the drive of the actuators such as the solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the random number update process 1 (step S126), and the random number update process 2 (step S127) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, 37d, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and error The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S130) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and board radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S123) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the input process of the first embodiment.

In this input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S145). S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and the switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, in the first embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S150). Step S151), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, the switch reading process (step S153) is performed to end the input process.

As the switches to be monitored by the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, a glass frame open detection switch 63, a main body frame open detection switch 64, a RAM initialization switch 112 (handled as unused in this process), There are a power failure monitoring signal (handled unused in this process), a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400. As the switches to be monitored by the second input port 123, the starting port 1 switch 36a (“starting port 1 winning signal”), the starting port 2 switches 37a, 37d (by pattern branching, the “starting port 2 winning signal” and “normal electric combination” (Output as object 1 winning signal 1)), winning opening switch 35a ("ordinary winning opening winning signal"), large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and gate switch 34a ("ordinary symbol 1" There is a gate passage signal 1 ”). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the switch reading process of the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S161). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S162), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area 1 Save (store) in (step S164). After that, it waits for the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S165).

When the delay time (about 100 μs) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step S169). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S170), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is set as a confirmation bit (step S171).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state as 0 and the bits having different states as 1 in the first and second readings are created (step S172), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step S174), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step S175). The switch read process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been executed, but if this is done, the correct determination may not be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S124) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output process of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data to be output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S182).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The line output data is acquired (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2 of the batch display device 50, and the LED_d18 from the LED_d3, the round display, the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 1 symbol display, the special figure 2 symbol display, and the general drawing There is a symbol display, a normal figure hold display, and a status display (game status display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is "door / frame opening" and "security signal".

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol confirmation number signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". Signal "etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information output and the launch permission signal output (step S191).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196) to end the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is the process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is the process of transmitting the payout command.

In the payout command transmission process, first, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), each of them is checked. , It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area 2 that stores up to 255 prizes (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If the subtraction result is determined to be "0" or more (step S209; Y) in step S209, the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211). Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 scheduled payouts, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; Y). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated to "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed. In this way, the payout command is not sent for each timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud". "Medium", "Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Overpayment error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and in step S214, it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas is completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 1 of the first embodiment. This random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). When the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). If the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next big hit symbol random number of the loaded general figure is loaded. The initial value of is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

When the hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). When the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the random number counter corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded hit random number (step S238). It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number region) (step S239). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is corresponded to. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and variable pattern random numbers 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and random number update processing is performed. In 2, both are set as update targets, and the update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is set from "0" to "3". Update within the range (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random counter (hereinafter, referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter for which the value is set is loaded (step S254). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether or not the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). Then, when the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this is masked). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the value obtained), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step S258). ), The process proceeds to step S259. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. be.

Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), the value of the random number region to be updated (2 bytes) is set (2 bytes). Step S260) and step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. Is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

In step S262, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S253. (Step S263). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step S264), and this value is set to 1 byte. It is saved in the random number area lower than the random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S267). , The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start area of the start port distribution device 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Fluctuating pattern for determining Random number updating means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning port switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table (for example, the port to which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is input. Data indicating the number of the signal, the bit position in the port of the signal, and the like are stored) (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) to win the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is obtained. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) to be detected is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S275), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S275) is performed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning. Step S276) is executed.

Next, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. The number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals for monitoring the error status of the gaming machine 10 is to be monitored this time is set to "0". To update in the range of "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab is prepared (step S280). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S282). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine status in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S285). Then, the gaming machine status check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. It should be noted that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring has a 16 ms cycle.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
Next, fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fraud & winning monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In addition, in each winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, "data for determining whether or not there is an input (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of fraudulent monitoring information", and "illegal winning""Lower address of several areas", "Illegal winning error notification command", "Illegal winning number upper limit (number of illegal winning judgments)", "Address of winning opening switch table" and "Notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that the information is defined.

This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. For the large prize opening (special variable prize device 38) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), it is easy to commit fraud by forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting the game ball, and paying out the prize ball. Besides, it monitors fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch for which the gaming machine status is monitored is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the game machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S293). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the number of target fraudulent winnings is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S293). For example, it is determined whether or not the number is 5 or more (step S295).

The number of judgments is set to 5, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being immediately judged to be fraudulent when a prize is won after passing the mark or when noise is added to the signal. As a result, it is possible to prevent a simple determination of fraudulent even when it is not necessarily fraudulent.

Then, when the number is not equal to or more than the determined number (step S295; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the number of determinations (step S295; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S298), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and the winning number counter update process (step S301) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S303). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), this fraudulent & winning monitoring process ends. As information for which the update of the notification timer is not permitted, there is a large winning opening switch 38a. This is because one big winning opening is monitored with two switches. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer will be updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer will time up in half of the specified time. In order to avoid such timer update, the update at the timing of the big winning opening switch that performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. Further, when the notification timer is allowed to be updated as in the large winning opening switch and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 that are to be monitored later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is set to "0". If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to "0".

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is one of the winning opening switches 38a, and when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is the other winning opening switch 38a. Is not allowed. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the large winning opening switch 38a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305), and if the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, if the time is not up, fraud & winning monitoring End the process. Further, when the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S306), and the illegal prize release flag is prepared as the illegal flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308).

When the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is set. It is cleared (step S309), and the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310). Further, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S310; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S311), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S311). Step S312), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, the fraudulent notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the occurrence of fraud, and the fraudulent prize fraud release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the release of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update processing (steps S278, S301) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning number counter update processing of the first embodiment. In addition, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, the information of the "repetition count" and the "data for determining whether or not there is an input" defined for each switch are used. (Monitoring switch bit) ”,“ lower address of the winning number counter area 1 ”and“ lower address of the winning number counter area 2 ”are defined.

In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (Step S322).

If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs. (Step S325). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning number counter for the winning ball (sending the payout command) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range of "0" to "65535". If an overflow occurs (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step S329). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). As a result, the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range of "0" to "255". If an overflow occurs (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is passed.

When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step S322). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, a prize ball is set according to the winning.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S286) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of the first embodiment. In addition, in each game machine state monitoring table prepared by the winning port switch / state monitoring process, "lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area" and "port of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored""Lower address of input state area", "Mask data to extract only the bits of the target signal", "Signal on judgment data", "Status off command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to end error notification)", Information of "status on command (meaning of command to start error notification in the case of error system)", "status off monitoring timer comparison value", and "status on monitoring timer comparison value" is defined respectively.

In this gaming machine status check process, first, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S341), and whether or not the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether or not it is in a state indicating an error. Determine (step S342). The case where the signal to be monitored is not on means a normal state in which the error system is not an error, and the touch switch means a non-touched state. Further, the case where the signal to be monitored is on means an error (abnormal, invalid) state for an error system, and a touched state for a touch switch.

In step S342, when the signal is not on (step S342; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S343), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

On the other hand, when the signal is on (step S342; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S346), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S347). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S349; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal do not match (step S349; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine status check process is terminated. When the value of the target status monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). ), The prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S355).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the state prepared above is turned off. The effect command setting process for transmitting either the command or the status on command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine status check process is completed.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of the first embodiment.

In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361), and if the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S361). Step S362), the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the off-determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

In step S361, when the payout busy signal is on (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the on-determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

Next, the value in the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). When the value in the busy signal state region and the state of the current signal match (step S366; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369). It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). Further, when the value in the busy signal state region and the state of the current signal do not match (step S366; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state region (step S366; N). Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), this payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or higher than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). , The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S129) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set. In the special figure game process, first, the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when the game ball is won in the start port distribution device 36 which forms the first start winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 which forms the second start winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are generated. Extraction is performed, and the game result based on the prize is preliminarily determined before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. The game result pre-judgment is performed.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a (large winning opening switch 1, large winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has been up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure for setting information necessary for processing, etc. The normal processing (step A8) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, but if it is the final round. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) is performed to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, set the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing, and the like.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. Perform the small hit fanfare process (step A15) to set the necessary information.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the command setting of the small hit middle operation transition processing and the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. are performed. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A16) to be performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do it.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to win a prize in the start port 1. It is determined whether or not there is (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that the starting port 1 has won a prize (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). .. The determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is being supported by the electric power, and does not include the high or low of the probability state in the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the starting port 1 (starting port distribution device 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when the starting port 1 is won during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) (step A107), the special figure start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the starting port 2 (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variable winning device 37. When it is determined whether or not the device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 Move to the processing of and perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a general electric motor fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), a special figure is provided. The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A121). , It is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a special figure start port switch common process of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d are input.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step A133). .. When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes through step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (Step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by "+1" ( Step A136), the start opening winning flag to be monitored is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step A138). Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting port distribution device 36) has won a prize (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the starting port 1 is not a prize (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the starting port 1 has been won (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol random number of RWM is extracted. Save to the storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.

Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start port distribution device 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, and changes the special figure. It serves as a starting prize storage means that stores a predetermined number up to a predetermined number as starting memory that is the execution right of the display game. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36) as the first start memory up to a predetermined number. , Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, the start port winning flag saved in step A137 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting port distribution device 36) has won a prize (step A151). ).

If it is determined in step A151 that the starting port 1 is not a prize (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the starting port 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure holding time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A152, when it is determined that the special figure time is not shortened (step A152; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is in progress (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not being hit or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is supported. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting port distribution device 36) has won a prize (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the starting port 1 has not been won (step A158; N), the stop symbol information for the outlier is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and thereafter. Perform the processing of.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the starting port 1 has won a prize (step A158; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A159) for determining the above is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is provided. It is acquired (step A162), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process (step A165) is performed. Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A169) and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is directed and controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is provided to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state (step A201). If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A205, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the process during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the processing for the remaining balls of the large winning opening is being performed (step A202).

If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is not in progress (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the processing is in progress during the small hit (in the small hit game state) (step A203).

If the small hit middle process is in progress (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204).

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.

Since the value of the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game is checked by checking the value of the special figure game processing number. Can be checked. Therefore, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked to determine whether or not the large winning opening is being processed, the large winning opening remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, and the small hit remaining ball is being processed. Do it.

Then, "0" is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the large winning opening switch monitoring process this time (step A205), and is there an input to the large winning opening switch 1? Is determined (step A206).

If there is no input to the large winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210, and subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to ". +1 ”update (step A209).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210), and if there is no input in the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. Subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), the effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to ". +1 ”update (step A213).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), and when the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215), and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215). In step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.

When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216), and when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; At Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (“1” or “2”) is added to the number of large winning openings (step A217), and the number of large winning openings is increased. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

If the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step A218; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the processing during the small hit is in progress (step A221).

If the small hit middle process is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the value of the end of the small hit opening operation is saved in the large winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not been started. (Step A311; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), the effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. .. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

Further, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A303), and the effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

Further, in step A306, when the special figure 1 reserved number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A308), and the effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special figure Normal processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A322).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 is completed. do.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A307) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special figure 1 Figure The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 30 for the second start memory. It is done as.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure 2 Figure The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A352). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A353), and the information of the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A354). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A355) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined (step SA356).

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A355) is a jackpot (step A356; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A360), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A372), and the information of the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A373). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined (step SA375).

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process, jackpot flag 1 setting process, and jackpot flag 2 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of order. Therefore, “other than big hit (missing)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A383). ..

Then, in the case of high probability (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A384). Step A386). If the probability is not high (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step). A386).

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is small. Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or a miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of order. , "Other than big hit (missing)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit determination process of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, the small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). In addition, the small hit judgment is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit judgment. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is out of order, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and whether or not the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value is determined. Judgment (step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is an outlier, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of holds). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts with the hit as an opportunity, and the shift destination of the effect mode that shifts after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, in the case of a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in Special Figure 1, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be probabilistic depending on whether or not the game state is probabilistic. It is decided whether to switch to the production mode or to shift to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not the mode is probable. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A410; Y), special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A419), and the effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). , The information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (step A431; Y) Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1 hold number) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a dedicated effect mode in which the probability change is confirmed regardless of the jackpot symbol. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and the effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the start port 1 (start port distribution device 36), and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). ), The second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

Next, the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holdes does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half as a result. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 change start process, and change pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in special figure 2 change start will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the first embodiment.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target variation pattern is obtained. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment (step A474), and if it is out of alignment (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed to perform a step. The process shifts to the processing of A477, and the subsequent processing is performed. If it is not out of alignment (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to the process of step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, the distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A337 and A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the variation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by "-1" (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about the pattern and a stop information command including information about the extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1", which is a processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a processing number (step A511), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A512).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). The signal relating to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is a signal for turning on the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1", which is a processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a processing number (step A521), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A522).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in special figure 2 (the signal during change in special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 2) is completed.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, and the same display time is set for the big hit symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed to end the special figure display process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process display transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during special figure display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A611). Step A612).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation. Further, the signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output is executed in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Then (step A617), the process transition setting process during display of the special figure is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information in the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. include.

On the other hand, in step A705, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is determined. (Step A706; Y), the test signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the round. The number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 1. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired. Save in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A717).

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is on when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned off otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is turned on when it is a big hit with a ball, and is turned off when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the information of the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information The flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A726) and the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step A727). ) Is performed to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and subsequent processes are performed.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the small hit is generated. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the player from being aware of the above.

Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation number update process (step A735), the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step). A736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation is a different value in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes (rotation speed: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.). It may be the same value (rotation speed) in any one of the plurality of production modes, or the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes. ) May be.

If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation number update process (steps A726, A735) in the process during display of the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step A751), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process is performed. To finish.

When the special figure has a high probability (step A751; Y), the high probability variation number of times for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A752), and is high. It is determined whether or not the number of probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and the signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A753; Y). Step A755). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction, or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727, A736) in the process during display of the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect mode information check process of the first embodiment.

In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771), and when the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), The production mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed. For example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state, etc. Is.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by "-1" (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). The process of step A772 serves as a counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.

If the remaining number of rotations of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining number of rotations of the effect is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

The effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A777), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A777). The effect mode to be shifted (the effect mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode transition information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information regarding the next effect mode of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). The process of step A776 is an effect mode execution control means that controls execution of one of a plurality of effect modes (game modes) according to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, that is, when the probability state does not change (step A780; Y), the effect mode is performed without transmitting the command to the effect control device 300. The information check process ends. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), save the prepared probability information command in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A781), and set the effect command. The process (step A782) is performed.

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed. Then, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A785), an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information is checked. End the process.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792).

Next, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signal relating to the start of the big hit includes, for example, a signal for turning on one big hit signal (output by big hit + small hit) and a signal for turning on four big hit signals (output by big hit).

Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included.

After that, clear the information of the number of rounds area that manages the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A795), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A796), and set the normal game mode flag. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). Figure Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation that can be executed in the high probability state. Clear the information in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region that manages the number of display games (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and the normal state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the effect mode, the information of the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). , Save the non-updated code in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and in order to light the display LED during right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing transition setting processing 1 during the small hit fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process 1, first, "7", which is the processing number related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing, is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one big hit signal (outputs as a big hit + a small hit).

Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information in the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process 1 is completed.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A903) is performed.

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired opening switching determination. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the value (step A906).

When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (0.2s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. After saving (step A907), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed in order to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A908), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed in order to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot pattern, (1) 4R, big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, big winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), (4) 4R, large winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, large winning Mouth opening information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big prize opening information 6 (1-8R is long open, 9-16R is short open), (7) 16R, big prize opening information 7 (1) ~ 4R is set to long opening, and 5 to 16R is set to short opening).

Therefore, in the large winning opening operation judgment table, the large winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching judgment value "0" are displayed, and the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching judgment value "16" are displayed in the large winning opening opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16". , The large winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value "8" are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value "4". Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

[Processing while the big winning opening is open Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, "4", which is the processing number related to the processing during opening of the large winning opening, is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A912). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process of opening the large winning opening, first, whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of RWM. Is determined (step A1001).

In the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the ending command is prepared (step). A1009), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is increased. It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

When the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

After that, the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.
[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of RWM. Is determined (step A1101).

In the case of the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1111), the loaded flag, the large winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A1111). For example, 1.9s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the jackpot remaining ball processing is completed.

If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value. In the case (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank down effect system (step A1106), and the large winning opening opening information is displayed. If it is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A1106; Y). In step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), the interval time (for example, 3.6 s) for the rank-down effect is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. , Perform the subsequent processing.

Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is completed.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, the signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal regarding the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.
[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, the process number “6” related to the jackpot end process is set as the process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

Then, the signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal regarding the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). .. Then, the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is stored. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information in the large winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process is completed.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing of the first embodiment.

In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201). If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. ..

Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and the effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed.

As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which information on the production mode is further included in either "high probability / with time reduction" or "high probability / without time reduction". In the case of the first embodiment, since the probability change state (so-called ST state) is always reached when the big hit ends, the probability information commands include "high probability / time saving / effect mode A" and "high probability / time reduction / effect". There are "Mode B", "High probability / No time saving / Production mode C", and "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", which are not used in this process, but in addition, "Low probability / No time reduction / Production mode A" , "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode B", "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode C".

Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and the effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A1214), an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a time saving state occurs after the jackpot ends (step). A1216).

When the time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.
If the time saving state does not occur after the jackpot ends (step A1216; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1217), the effect command setting process (step A1218) is performed, and then the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed to end the jackpot end process.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal regarding no time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 2 signal.

Next, the signal relating to the start without the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time. It includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number without the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure high probability & no time saving flag (step A1225). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (step A1226), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data region (step A1227). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is completed.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal relating to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal relating to the start of the time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning on the jackpot 2 signal. Since the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.

The signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is then saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). The signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. Includes a signal to turn on, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal, and a signal to turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number with the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Special figure High probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A1242).

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot includes, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal for turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal for turning off the jackpot 4 signal.

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signals related to the end of the jackpot are a signal for turning off the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning off the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, a signal for turning off the signal for hitting the special symbol 1, and a signal for turning off the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Includes a signal that turns off the signal.

Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1248), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 To finish.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit fanfare processing during the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle process, the small hit middle process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare middle process is completed.
[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, "8", which is the processing number related to the small hit medium processing, is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1312). ).

Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and the information of the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the initial value of the small hit operation (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit medium processing transition setting process is terminated.
[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit medium processing, first, the small hit medium control pointer is loaded from the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). It is determined whether or not the above is the case (step A1402).

When the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit medium control pointer in the small hit medium control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403). ), The small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed. When the value of the loaded small hit middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is special. Figure It is determined whether or not the probability is high (step A1406). In the determination in step A1406, the probability state is the determination target, and the time saving state is not the determination target.

When the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1409, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit medium process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). When the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "0", "2", "4" (step A1411; pointer = 0,2,4), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

When the values of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 are "1", "3", and "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding large winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

The small hit operation consists of a small hit fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent wait time (1500 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait. The time (1500 ms), the subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), the subsequent wait time (1500 ms), the subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (1900 ms). It is a series of operations of a total of 7600 ms consisting of a small hit ending time (100 ms).

In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the first large winning opening opening time elapses, and the value of the control pointer goes through the respective processes corresponding to "0" to "5". The value of the control pointer is "6". In this way, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit remaining ball processing is performed after the four opening operations of the special variable winning device 38. In the small hit operation, the small hit ending time is set after the remaining ball processing time, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 ms, which is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time of 1900 ms to the controlled small hit ending time of 100 ms.

During the small hit fanfare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, during the large winning opening opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) in the above-mentioned small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number "9" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1421). Step A1422).

Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is completed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) is performed to end the small hit remaining ball processing.
[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, "10", which is the processing number related to the small hit end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512). ).

Then, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting process is performed. To finish.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end process, first, the flag related to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step). A1602). When the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is set. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

Then, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). ..

If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and the effect command setting process (step A1610) is performed. Perform A1611).

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed. In addition, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A1614), an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. When the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and the effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed.

Then, the flag related to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time saving (step A1620). When the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.

When the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special time reduction (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to make a small number. The hit end process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A1632).

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit signal. Further, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1637), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 is performed. finish.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in the above-mentioned special figure game processing subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect command setting process of the first embodiment.

In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

As a result, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" as in the production command, but a byte configuration of more than that may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process ends.

By writing the command data (ACTION) to the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be done.

In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives each of these commands and performs effect control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since the serial communication is performed by using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the symbol variation control process of the first embodiment.

In the symbol variation control process, first, the target variation control flag is set and it is checked whether or not the symbol is changing (step A1801), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not it is changing (step A1802). ..

When it is changing (step A1802; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blinking control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805).

When the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area of the target symbol (step A1806).
Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by "+1" (step A1807), and the process proceeds to step A1808. If the blinking control timer is not "0" (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1808.

Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1808), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1811), and the symbol variation control process is completed. do.

In step A1802, when it is not changing (step A1802; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1809). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1810), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1811), and the symbol variation control process is completed. do.

Information on the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game processing. There is.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sorting process of the first embodiment.

In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation group table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, or the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. Is.

In the sorting process, first, the first data of the prepared second half variation group table (selection table), second half variation selection table (selection table), and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0"). ) (Step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not require, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1902; Y). Step A1907), the sorting process is completed. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is displayed. The first specified distribution value is acquired (step A1903).

Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A1903 is obtained from the random number values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process. After subtracting and calculating a new random number value (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A1905; N), the process returns to the process of step A1903 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A1906).

That is, after acquiring the distribution values specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table in step A1903, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. Is subtracted, and a new random number value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). The above process is executed in step A1905 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, any one of the second half fluctuation selection table and the second half Select the variable number or the first half variable number. Then, in step A1905, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1907), and the distribution process is completed. do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process of the first embodiment.

The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 75, in the 2-byte distribution process, first, is the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process a code without distribution (that is, "0")? (Step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A2002; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. do. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step A2003).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step A2004). , It is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2005; N), the process returns to the process of step A2003 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2006). That is, in step A2003, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, a new random number value is further calculated (step A2004). At this time, if there is a random number value determined in step A2005, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the determined random number value. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005).

The above process is executed in step A2005 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the latter half variable group table. Then, in step A2005, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game processing (step S130) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal diagram game processing of the first embodiment. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

In this normal map game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and then a general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. To do. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. Performs the process of setting the reference normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5), and performs the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) using the table. .. Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed using the game processing number.

In step B7, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the processing during the normal map fluctuation are performed. Perform the usual processing (step B8) to set the information necessary for the purpose. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal electric opening time can be set according to whether or not the time is shortened, or the normal. Performs the normal map display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the figure-per-figure process. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal drawing (step) for continuing the processing during the normal drawing or setting the information necessary for performing the processing for the remaining spheres of the normal power. Perform B11).

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing is performed. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) is performed.

After that, a normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display is prepared (step B14), and the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15). To end the normal map game processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal-figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process is shifted to step B14, and subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (step B102). Here, the right-handed game state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time reduction (during normal power support). In the case of a right-handed gaming state (step B102; Y), the process shifts to step B105. When the game is not in the right-handed game state (step B102; N), the left-handed command is prepared (step B103), the effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, the normal figure hold number is acquired, and the normal figure hold number is obtained. Is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) or not (step B105).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is changed. Calculate (step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N). , The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the universal power winning switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this general-purpose winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal-figure winning switch is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal-figure fluctuation display game is in the hitting state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. Is determined (step B111). Then, when it is hitting the normal drawing (step B111; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B114), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When it is determined, based on the fact that the count number of the normal power counter has reached the upper limit, as a process for closing the normal power, the value of the end of operation (for example, "4") is saved by hitting the control pointer area during the normal drawing (for example, "4"). Step B115), the general figure game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general electric winning switch monitoring process is completed. That is, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more during the hitting state of the normal figure, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the hitting of the normal figure at that time, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B111 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B111; N), when it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114. When it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), this general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a normal process of the first embodiment. In this normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121; Y), it is normal. Figure Normal process Transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal figure normal process is completed. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B121; N), a random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step B122). , The hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to zero (step B123).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual, that is, the time is shortened (step B124). When the normal figure is not in high probability (step B124; N), the low probability lower limit judgment value is set (step B125), and when the normal figure is in high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit judgment value is set. Set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are common values (for example, "251"). Further, the low probability lower limit judgment value and the high probability lower limit judgment value are different values (for example, the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251" and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1"), and the low probability lower limit judgment value and the low probability lower limit judgment value. In comparison, the high probability lower limit judgment value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability becomes larger in the high probability than in the low probability, for example, 0/251 in the low probability and 250/251 in the high probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127), and when the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value. (Step B128). In step B127, when the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), that is. In the case of a miss, the miss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the miss stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the miss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). Further, in steps B127 and B128, when the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B127; N, step B128; N). Step B132), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols.

Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B137), the free area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "-1" (step B139). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 is executed, the ranking of the normal figure holding numbers "2" to "4" that are held after the normal figure holding number "1" is executed. Is carried out one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by "1".

Then, the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is terminated.
[Usually process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the above-mentioned normal drawing normal processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B151), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B152). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal figure will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B161). Step B162), the normal map fluctuation time (common to both low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B163). After that, the signal relating to the start of the normal map variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). The signal relating to the start of the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the changing flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B166), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal map changing process is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing transition setting process (step B171) in the above-mentioned normal map changing process will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during display of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during display of the normal map, first, the process number is set to "2" (step B181) as the setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map, and the process number is set to the normal map game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B183). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). The signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B185), and the normal map display process transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during display of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B191), and the information in the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B193; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. The normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. 80. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B194).

Then, the hit start pointer value (any of the control pointers "0", "2", and "4") corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit middle control pointer area (step B195). The normal power release time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it can be opened four times. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B197) is performed to end the process during display of the normal map.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B197) in the above-mentioned normal map display process will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the intermediate processing transition setting processing per normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B201), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B202). After that, the signal relating to the start of the hit of the normal map variation display game (the signal relating to the hit of the normal map variation display game) and the signal relating to the start of the normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). The signal related to the start of hitting the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the middle signal per normal symbol, and the signal related to the start of normal electric operation is a signal for turning on the normal electric accessory 1 running signal. Is.

Next, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the Fuden solenoid (step B204).
Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of prizes in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the number of winnings for the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the winning number area (step B206). Then, the flag defining the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is completed.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded normal figure hitting control pointer is the value in the normal drawing hitting control pointer upper limit area. It is determined whether or not (the value at the end of winning) has been reached (step B212).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer per normal figure (step B212; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by "+1" (step B213). , The normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214) is performed, and the normal process is completed. Further, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (value at the end of hitting) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal electric operation transition setting is set. The process (step B214) is performed, and the process during normal drawing is completed.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of the first embodiment. This normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B221).

If the value of the control pointer is either "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the solenoid game processing timer area (step B222). The off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B223), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is either "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the solenoid opening time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the solenoid game processing timer area (step). B224), the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B226. That is, "4" is set as the processing number in order to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) (step B226). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B227), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B228). After that, the off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B229), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Next, the operation of the normal electric power in the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary variable winning device of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

In the case of the winning symbol 1 in the ordinary variable winning device 37, the normal electric operation is composed of the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (500 ms), and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms), for a total of 1200 ms. It is a series of operations of. In the case of the winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes "4" after the lapse of the normal electric power opening time, and the normal electric power remaining ball processing is performed after one opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 2 in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal power operation is performed by the normal power display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal power opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent. It is a series of operations of a total of 4800 ms, which consists of a normal electric opening time (1700 ms) and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 2, the control pointer value becomes "2" after the first normal power release time elapses, and the control pointer value is controlled through the respective processes corresponding to "2" and "3". The value of the pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 twice.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 3 in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal electric operation is performed by the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent. It is a series of operations of a total of 6700 ms including a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the lapse of the first normal power release time, and the value of the control pointer corresponds to "0", "1", "2", and "3". The value of the control pointer becomes "4" through each process. In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 three times.

During the normal map display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the normal variable solenoid 37c. Further, during the normal electric opening time, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened by the on control of the general electric solenoid 37c.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal figure game processing will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric remaining ball processing of the first embodiment. In this normal power remaining ball processing, the normal power remaining ball processing is completed by performing the normal drawing end processing transition setting process (step B231).

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the end processing transition setting processing (step B231) per normal figure in the above-mentioned ordinary electric remaining ball processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing transition setting processing per normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal figure per end process transition setting process, first, the process number "5" related to the normal figure per end process is set (step B241), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B242). ).

After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B243), and the signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Next, the information in the normal electric count number area for counting the number of prizes won in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B246), and the end process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the end process per normal figure (step B13) in the above-mentioned normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing per normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hit end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed to end the normal figure hit end process.

[Usually processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "0" related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B261), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B262). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). The signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal symbol fluctuation game is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

After that, the flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the Fudaden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the segment LED editing process of the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings related to driving of the round display unit 51 provided in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the normal figure hold display unit 56, and the LEDs constituting the status display unit 57, etc. To do.

In the segment LED editing process, first, "1" is added to the blinking control timer to update it (step C11). The blinking control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display is determined (step C12), and when the output is on timing (step C12; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on timing is set. If not (step C12; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C14). It should be noted that the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display can be determined by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, the blinking cycle of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms.

After that, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved numbers of the normal figure is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table 1 or the number of reserved normal figures display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing the display data of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18.

For example, the normal figure hold number display table 1 and the normal figure hold number display table 2 have the same value for the normal figure hold numbers "0" to "2", but different values for the normal figure hold numbers "3" and "4". Is. As a result, in the normal figure hold display unit 56, the corresponding LED is turned off when the normal figure hold number is "0", the corresponding LED is turned on when the normal figure hold number is "1", and the normal figure hold number is "3". , "4" realizes the blinking of the corresponding LED.

Next, the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and when the output is on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C18). It should be noted that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2, and is saved in the segment area (step C19). It should be noted that the special figure 1 hold display unit 52 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Next, the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display is determined (step C20), and when the output is on timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C21), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C22). The determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 2 hold number display table 2, and is saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode of the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C25). ..

Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C26), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C27).
After that, the game status display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is completed.

Next, the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activity will be described. For a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value according to the result of the gaming, a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining the gaming value may be performed. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activity, and detection methods and conditions are required according to each type. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be detected accurately.

In particular, erroneously determining that an abnormal condition has occurred even though an abnormal condition leading to fraudulent activity has not occurred, and issuing a notification, etc., causes distrust of the player and is a factor for avoiding the game in the game machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent such false detection of abnormal conditions.

Therefore, the game machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For the purpose of preventing false detection of an abnormal state, for example, the following magnet fraud monitoring process and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 that forms a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be paraphrased as a magnet sensor.

In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. Whether or not it is determined (step C31). When the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, "1" is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed up (step C33).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed up (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), the abnormality is determined. When an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region is determined. Judgment (step C43).

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time is specified. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet fraud notification timer to update (step C39). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C33; N), the process proceeds to step C39.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C40; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the fraud notification period is over, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been performed from, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step C41). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step C43).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), the effect command setting process is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed. do.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 that forms a radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

Then, a command for notifying the board radio wave fraud is prepared (step C53), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C54), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the panel radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred only when the panel radio wave sensor detects an abnormal radio wave once.

On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step C51; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0". "1" is subtracted from the timer to update (step C55). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the fraudulent notification period is over, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been made from, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step C57), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C58), and prepare the board radio wave fraud. It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value in the radio wave invalid flag area (step C59).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), the effect command setting process is performed (step C61), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, the gaming machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but when magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time, it is determined to be in an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the occurrence as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, damage can be minimized by immediately determining an abnormal state when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

In the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected, but a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a non-abnormal state may be detected, and is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. The state in which magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal radio waves is simply set to the state of receiving radio waves, but it is possible to receive radio waves of a strength that is not received in a non-abnormal state or in a non-abnormal state. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves of a frequency that does not exist. Further, a state in which a radio wave having an intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave having a specific frequency may be detected may be regarded as an abnormality. When setting the threshold value by the magnetic strength, the radio wave strength, and the frequency, the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62 may output a signal when the threshold value is exceeded, or the control device side sets the threshold value. You may want to monitor if it is exceeded.

From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector Originally, an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state is provided, and in the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time. In some cases, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred, but in the case of a radio detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. 96 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are used. Based on this, the process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device of the amusement park or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

Magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), general electric signal fraud is occurring (step C83; Y), or a big prize is awarded. When the mouth fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general power fraud, or grand prize opening fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is tested. Save to the signal output data area (step C87).

Next, in the external information editing process, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. To do. Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step C91).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is set to the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and end the external information editing process. If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Is a process to output to an external device.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of main prize ball signal output is "0" (step C103).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not "0" (step C103; N), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is updated by "-1" (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is displayed. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is the time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106; Y), the process shifts to step C107. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C106; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts is transmitted to the outside. It should be noted that, after the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device to complete the payout of the game ball. From the time when the payout condition is satisfied to the time when the payout number of game media is paid out, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

That is, the game control device 100 can output information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the number of game media to be paid out. It serves as an external output means.

However, if the number of prize balls generated is small and the number is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) even if this is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area, information on the planned number of game media payouts after the actual payout is completed. May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, "1"), the payout condition is always satisfied until the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information regarding the number of planned game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out.

From the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the game machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the payout number of game media is paid out. It is provided with an external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information regarding the planned number of game media payouts to the outside. It is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on the storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game media payouts that have not been output to the outside, and the establishment of the payout conditions. The addition means (game control device 100) for adding the planned number of game media payouts corresponding to the established payout conditions to the game medium storage area, and the number of scheduled game media payouts stored in the game medium storage area have reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside and the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. It is provided with a subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) for each payout schedule of a predetermined number of units (for example, 10) of game media. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from "OFF" to "ON" when the value of the output control timer is "48", and from "ON" to "OFF" when the value of the output control timer is "16". And keeps "OFF" until the value of the output control timer becomes "0". That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a 192 ms pulse signal consisting of a 128 ms “ON” time and a 64 ms “OFF” time.

Unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) for each payout of a predetermined number of units (for example, 10) of game media. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device confirm the consistency between the payout schedule of the game medium and the payout result of the game medium, and can deal with the illegal payout.

Further, in the winning during the big hit period, when the payout of the game medium is delayed due to the ball running out or the like and the game medium is paid out after the big hit is completed, the external device may use only the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on a prize during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that the external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step C89) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a start port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 37d.

In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not "0" (step C113; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by "-1" (step C114), and the start port signal is output to the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal (for example, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is completed. When the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0" (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116; Y), the process shifts to step C117. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C116; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C116; N). Step C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special figure for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is a special figure for this effect. It means (decorative pattern that is not this special figure).

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the land function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes the reception command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or 1/30 second or less. The frame may be switched at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D31, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of voice from speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs such as the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the point display 49.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces an effect according to the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the number of balls rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

[Step D31] The control unit executes the point control process. The point control process is a process of managing the cumulative value of the number of points given when the winning detection of the point gate 48 is detected, and controlling the granting of benefits according to the cumulative value of the number of points.

The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D31. That is, steps D18 to D31 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends the effect command to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the command reception process from the main board is performed by the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is normal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the amount of the stored data. In the explanation of the processing, the term "storing" simply means that the product is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control processing (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", proceeds to step D43 if the number of command receptions is not "0", and if the number of command receptions is "0". Ends the received command check process. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit sets the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a fluctuation system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined to be in the normal range (at this point, the toothlessness check described later has not been performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value is the correct combination with respect to the separated MODE value. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination is executed including the tooth omission check of whether or not the ACT value is a normal combination for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command Is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, a variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command that commands a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the production during the jackpot, and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol-based command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and receives it when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. End the command analysis process. The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for the look-ahead effect.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. Etc. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Point control processing]
First, a point game that is a target of point control will be described. The point game is a game effect in which points given when the winning detection (passage detection) of the point gate 48 is accumulated, and the accumulated value of the number of points is exchanged for a privilege at a predetermined opportunity and given to the player. .. The privilege to be granted is that the effect control device 300 executes an effect that appears less frequently in a normal game or an effect that appears only by exchanging with the cumulative value of the number of points.

Next, the point control process will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flowchart of point control processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes the point initialization process. The point initialization process is a process of initializing the cumulative value of the number of points and the privilege given to the player at a predetermined initialization trigger. The point initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

[Step D72] The control unit executes the point update process. The point update process is a process of updating the cumulative value of the number of points at a predetermined opportunity. The point update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

[Step D73] The control unit executes the point exchange process. The point exchange process is a process of exchanging the accumulated value of the number of points for a privilege given to the player at a predetermined opportunity. The point exchange process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. The control unit ends the point control process after executing the point exchange process.

[Point initialization process]
Next, the point initialization process will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the point initialization process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point initialization process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the point control process. The point initialization process includes a process related to initialization of the accumulated point value and a process related to resetting the privilege granted by exchanging points.

[Step D81] The control unit acquires the state information. The state information is information for determining the reset trigger of the point cumulative value (cumulative value of the number of points). For example, the state information includes the game state of the special figure game or the normal figure game as the game control state information, and the effect control state information is the initial state after the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on or the control state associated with the privilege grant in the point game. Etc. are included.

[Step D82] The control unit determines whether or not the state specified from the acquired state information is a state that triggers a reset of the accumulated points. The control unit proceeds to step D83 when it is not in the reset trigger state, and proceeds to step D85 when it is in the reset trigger state.

For example, the control unit can determine that the initial state after the power is turned on is the trigger for resetting the accumulated points. As a result, the control unit can reset the point cumulative value in the initial state after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on after the power is turned on after the power is restored, the control unit can hold the accumulated points at the time of detecting the power failure without triggering the reset of the accumulated points. In addition, the control unit can determine that the privilege grant based on the accumulated points is an opportunity to reset the accumulated points. In addition, the control unit can determine that the gaming state such as the occurrence of a big hit is a trigger for resetting the accumulated points.

[Step D83] The control unit acquires the point cumulative value reset timer. The point cumulative value reset timer is a timer for determining the reset trigger of the point cumulative value over time. For example, the control unit sets the monitoring time (for example, 5 minutes) in the point cumulative value reset timer when the customer waiting state is detected. As a result, the control unit can use the timing at which the customer waiting state continues for the monitoring time as a trigger for resetting the point cumulative value.

[Step D84] The control unit determines, based on the point cumulative value reset timer, whether or not it is the timing that triggers the reset of the point cumulative value. The control unit proceeds to step D85 when it is the timing that triggers the reset of the accumulated points, and proceeds to step D86 when it is not the timing that triggers the reset of the accumulated points.

[Step D85] The control unit resets the accumulated point value (for example, clears "0"). The point cumulative value does not necessarily have to be reset by clearing "0", and may be reset by setting a random initial value (for example, "5", "10", etc.).

[Step D86] The control unit determines whether or not the state specified from the state information acquired in step D81 is a state that triggers the reset of the privilege given by the point exchange. The control unit proceeds to step D87 when it is in the reset trigger state, and ends the point initialization process when it is not in the reset trigger state.

For example, when the control unit sets the privilege given by exchanging points as a special effect during a big hit (for example, special video output or audio output), the control unit considers that the end of the big hit is an opportunity to reset the privilege given by exchanging points. Can be determined. In addition, when the privilege given by exchanging points is a special effect during a normal game (for example, special video output or audio output), it is determined that the occurrence of a big hit is an opportunity to reset the privilege given by exchanging points. Can be done. As a result, the control unit can clarify the end of the privilege granted by exchanging points.

[Step D87] The control unit acquires the privilege grant reset timer. The privilege grant reset timer is a timer for determining the reset trigger of the granted privilege over time. For example, the control unit sets the duration (for example, 10 minutes) in the privilege grant reset timer when the privilege is granted. As a result, the control unit can trigger the reset of the privilege that grants the timing that the privilege granting state continues for the duration.

[Step D88] The control unit determines whether or not it is the timing that triggers the reset of the privilege granted based on the privilege grant reset timer. The control unit proceeds to step D89 when it is the timing that triggers the reset of the granted privilege, and ends the point initialization process when it is not the timing that triggers the reset of the granted privilege.

[Step D89] The control unit resets the granted privilege (for example, returning from the special effect to the normal effect), and ends the point initialization process.
The gaming machine 10 may use the reset trigger of the granted privilege as a change detection of the player. In this case, the gaming machine 10 accumulates the first privilege granted earlier and the second privilege is given to the player. It may be given to. For example, the player can simultaneously enjoy a special display effect (for example, background display) as the first privilege and a special audio effect (for example, BGM (background music) output) as the second privilege.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 cumulatively grants the privilege to the player, the second privilege may be granted on condition that the first privilege is granted. For example, when the player enjoys a special display effect (for example, background display) as the first privilege, the player can enjoy a further special display effect (for example, premium background display) as the second privilege.

[Point update process]
Next, the point update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a flowchart of point update processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point update process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the point control process. The point update process is a process of determining the number of points to be given when the winning detection of the point gate 48 is detected and updating the accumulated point value.

[Step D91] The control unit acquires the state information. The state information is information for determining the valid state of the point gate 48 and the points to be given according to the gaming state at the time of winning the point gate 48. For example, the state information includes the game state of the special figure game or the normal figure game as the game control state information, and the effect control state information is the initial state after the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on or the control state associated with the privilege grant in the point game. Etc. are included.

[Step D92] The control unit determines whether or not the state specified from the acquired state information is the valid state of the point gate 48. The control unit proceeds to step D93 when it is in the valid state, and ends the point update process when it is not in the valid state.

[Step D93] The control unit determines whether or not there is a winning detection of the point gate 48. The control unit proceeds to step D94 when there is a winning detection, and ends the point update process when there is no winning detection. Note that the control unit can perform processing to detect the input change of the point gate 48 in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown), and whether or not there is a winning detection of the point gate 48 by referring to the detection result. Can be determined.

[Step D94] The control unit acquires a lottery random number for determining the number of points to be given when the winning detection of the point gate 48 is triggered. The lottery random number may be a counter value that is updated at a sufficiently high speed with respect to the winning opportunity of the point gate 48.

[Step D95] The control unit refers to the point table. Here, the point table will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a point table of the first embodiment.

The point table is data including the item "game state", the item "judgment value", and the item "additional points". The item "game state" includes a game state A, a game state B, a game state C, and a game state D. For example, the game state A is the normal game state in the special figure game, the game state B is the time-saving medium game state in the special figure game, the game state C is the probabilistic game state in the special figure game, and the game state D is. It is a game state during a big hit in a special figure game. It should be noted that it is possible to arbitrarily set which of the game state A, the game state B, the game state C, and the game state D is assigned to the specific game state. For example, the gaming state C may be assigned a small hit medium gaming state or a gaming state from the occurrence of the small hit to the elapse of a predetermined time instead of being assigned the probability changing gaming state. Further, the game state A, the game state B, the game state C, and the game state D may be assigned two or more game states. For example, the game state B is a time-saving medium-time game state or a probable change game state. May be assigned.

The item "determination value" is a determination value corresponding to the lottery random number (for example, a uniform random number from "0" to "255") acquired in step D94. The item "additional points" indicates the item "game state" and the addition points corresponding to the item "judgment value". For example, the point table indicates that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "250" in the game state corresponding to the game state A, and the lottery random number is from "251" to "251". When it is "254", it indicates that the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "255", it indicates that the addition point is "5". Further, the point table indicates that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "100" in the game state corresponding to the game state B, and the lottery random number is from "101" to "101". When it is "250", it indicates that the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "251" to "255", it indicates that the addition point is "5". Further, the point table indicates that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "200" in the game state corresponding to the game state C, and the lottery random number is from "201" to "201". When it is "250", it indicates that the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "251" to "255", it indicates that the addition point is "5". Further, the point table indicates that the addition point is "5" when the lottery random number is "0" to "255" in the game state corresponding to the game state D.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by making the addition points different depending on the lottery random numbers even if the gaming state is the same.
Further, in the point table, the size of the expected value of the added points given in each game state is different by making the judgment values of the game state A, the game state B, the game state C, and the game state D different. Can be done. Further, the point table may have fixed points to be added regardless of the value of the lottery random number as shown in the game state D. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of point gaming by raising or lowering the expected value according to the gaming state. Further, when the gaming state is not specified (for example, latent probability change, etc.), the gaming machine 10 can suggest the gaming state to the player from the size of the added points, and can improve the interest of the point game. ..

Returning to the description of the point update process using FIG. 106 again.
[Step D96] The control unit determines the points to be added from the state information acquired in step D91, the lottery random number acquired in step D94, and the point table.

[Step D97] The control unit adds the added points to the accumulated points, updates the accumulated points, and ends the point update process. When the accumulated points reach the upper limit due to the update, the surplus may be rounded down with the accumulated points as the upper limit.

Next, the point cumulative value update process will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a display example of a point indicator in the process of updating the cumulative value of points according to the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 can display the accumulated points on the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 by executing the point update process. As a result, in the gaming state A, as shown in the display example (a1) to the display example (a3), the gaming machine 10 sets the accumulated points to "1", "2", and "1", "2", and "1" for each prize in the point gate 48. 3 "can be updated. By such "1" increment update, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with a new hobby of point gaming.

Further, in the gaming state D, as shown in the display example (b1) to the display example (b3), the gaming machine 10 sets the accumulated points to "1", "6", and "11" for each prize in the point gate 48. Can be updated. By such "5" increment update, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with a hobby accompanied by a value change according to the gaming state.

Further, in a gaming state not specified, as shown in the display example (c1) to the display example (c3), the gaming machine 10 sets the accumulated points to "1", "6", and "" for each winning to the point gate 48. 7 "can be updated. By such an increment update in which a plurality of types of addition values are mixed, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with a hobby accompanied by various value changes according to the gaming state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can suggest a gaming state that is not specified to the player, and provide a hobby for the player to estimate the current gaming state. For example, in the point cumulative value update process as shown in the display example (c1) to the display example (c3), the possibility of the game state D is selected from the game state A, the game state B, the game state C, and the game state D. Deny. Further, in the point cumulative value updating process as shown in the display example (c1) to the display example (c3), the current gaming state is the gaming state A, the gaming state B, or the gaming state C based on the appearance frequency of the added value. Suggest.

That is, the point display 49 can function not only as a point cumulative value display means in the point game but also as a game state notification means.
The gaming machine 10 may suggest the gaming state to the player by the display mode of the 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b. For example, in a gaming state in which the point addition value is larger than in other gaming states as shown in the display example (b1) to the display example (b3), the display mode of the 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b is changed from the lighting display to the blinking display. It may be.

Although the point display 49 displays the point cumulative value, the point addition value may be displayed for a predetermined time when the point cumulative value is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp the size of the points to be added to the accumulated points. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify the player of the update of the accumulated points by sound effects, other lighting, or the like when updating the accumulated points. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the notification mode according to the size of the points added to the accumulated points. As a result, the player can easily grasp the timing of adding points to the accumulated points and the size of the points added to the accumulated points.

[Point exchange process]
Next, the point exchange process will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a flowchart of point exchange processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The point exchange process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the point control process. The point exchange process is a process for exchanging accumulated points for benefits.

[Step D101] The control unit acquires point exchange control information. The point exchange control information is control information related to the progress management of the point game. By referring to the point exchange control information, the control unit selects whether or not points can be added, whether or not the privilege can be exchanged, whether or not the privilege is being granted, and a selection operation related to the point exchange (privilege grant selection). Operation) It is possible to judge whether or not it is in progress.

[Step D102] The control unit determines from the acquired point exchange control information whether or not the privilege grant selection operation is in progress. When the privilege grant selection operation control state is set in step D105 described later, the control unit can determine that the privilege grant selection operation is in progress. The control unit proceeds to step D103 when the privilege grant selection operation is not in progress, and proceeds to step D107 when the privilege grant selection operation is in progress.

[Step D103] The control unit acquires the accumulated points.
[Step D104] The control unit determines whether or not the point exchange condition is satisfied. For example, the control unit determines that the point exchange condition is satisfied when the privilege exchange is possible and the accumulated point value reaches the upper limit value (for example, "100"). The control unit proceeds to step D105 when the point exchange condition is satisfied, and ends the point exchange process when the point exchange condition is not satisfied.

[Step D105] The control unit sets the privilege grant selection operation control state. The privilege grant selection operation control state is a control state that allows the player to select the privilege to be granted. The privilege selection and operation guidance are displayed on the display device 41, and the selection button switch 25a and the enter button for the privilege selection operation are displayed. This is a state in which the operation input from the switch 25b can be accepted. The control unit can display the privilege options and the operation guidance on the display device 41 by executing the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the privilege grant selection operation control state. Further, the control unit executes the effect button input process (step D19 of the main process) based on the privilege grant selection operation control state, from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b for the privilege selection operation. Can accept operation input.

[Step D106] The control unit resets the accumulated points and ends the point exchange process.
[Step D107] The control unit determines whether or not the player has determined the privilege. The control unit can determine whether or not the player has determined the privilege by the operation input from the determination button switch 25b during the operation reception time. In addition, when there is no operation input from the decision button switch 25b during the operation reception time, the control unit can consider that the player has decided the privilege set by default or the privilege during the selection operation.

[Step D108] The control unit sets a privilege determined by the player as a grant target. By executing the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the privilege set, the control unit displays the privileged video effect on the display device 41 and displays the privileged sound effect on the speaker (upper speaker). It is possible to output from 19a, the lower speaker 19b), or to operate a moving body such as a board effect device 44. After setting the privilege, the control unit ends the point exchange process.

Although the gaming machine 10 selects and determines the privilege to be granted by the player, the gaming machine 10 may grant a predetermined privilege without accepting the operation of the player. Further, the gaming machine 10 may randomly select one from a plurality of options or may select one according to a predetermined condition when the privilege is given without accepting the operation of the player.

Here, the option of the privilege and the operation guide displayed on the display device 41 by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a privilege selection operation screen to be displayed on the display device of the first embodiment.

The selection operation display 900 is a display including privilege options and operation guidance displayed on the display device 41 by the gaming machine 10. The selection operation display 900 includes a point game-related display 910 and a special figure game game display 914. The point game-related display 910 is a display related to the point game, and includes an operation guidance display 911 and a premium effect (point game privilege) option display 912. The operation guidance display 911 is a display that guides the player to the operation method related to the granting of the privilege of the point game by visual information such as characters, pictures, and icons. Further, the operation guide display 911 clearly indicates the option setting unit (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) 25 as the operation guide display 911a to guide the operation method.

The option display 912 displays options that can be selected as a privilege of the point game. For example, the option display 912 displays display effect A, display effect B, and display effect C as display effect options. The display effect includes, for example, a special background display, a pattern display, a character display, and a variable effect such as a display of a normally unspecified game state and a special reach. Further, the option display 912 displays the sound effect A, the sound effect B, and the sound effect C as the options for the sound effect. The voice effect includes, for example, a special BGM, a sound effect, a voice notification of a normally non-notification game state, and the like. Further, the option display 912 is an explicit display indicating the option being selected based on the operation input of the selection button switch 25a or the option determined based on the operation input of the decision button switch 25b (selection option explicit display or determination option). Explicit display) Display 913.

The special figure game game display 914 is a display including at least a part of display contents related to the game state of the special figure game displayed by the display device 41 before displaying the selection operation display 900. For example, the special figure game game display 914 clearly indicates that the special figure game is in the variable display when the special figure game is in the variable display. The special figure game game display 914 is not limited to the special figure game as long as it displays the information before the option display 912. As a result, even if the display content of the display device 41 is switched to the selection operation display 900, the game machine 10 can grasp the information regarding the display before the switching, and the selection operation display 900 misses the opportunity to judge the game. To prevent.

The gaming machine 10 is not limited to a privilege in a format that the player can directly perceive, such as video output and audio output, but may be a privilege in a format that the player can indirectly perceive. For example, instead of presenting a special video or audio to the player, the game machine 10 uses the effect vibration used to determine a specific effect mode when the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100. The minute table may be replaced with a special production distribution table. As a result, the gaming machine 10 increases the chances of presenting the player with an effect mode that normally appears infrequently as a privilege, or presents the player with an effect mode that normally has a low expected value for a big hit as a privilege. It can be reduced. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can produce an expected value different from the normal time as a privilege, and can improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that such a gaming machine 10 can provide a diversification of opportunities for a player to get an interest without having to cooperate with a mobile device such as a mobile phone or a smartphone in recent years. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide a variety of opportunities for the player to enjoy the interest even if the player is not accustomed to the operation of the portable device or the player does not have the portable device.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is provided with a point gate 48 and a point display 49 on the front side. The point gate 48 includes a point switch 48a, and detects a game ball that has won (including passing) the point gate 48 by the point switch 48a. The gaming machine 10 determines a predetermined number of points triggered by the winning detection of the point gate 48 (detection of the gaming medium including passage detection). The gaming machine 10 calculates a point accumulation value obtained by accumulating the determined number of points in a predetermined period (including while in a predetermined state). The point display 49 displays the accumulated point value. The gaming machine 10 exchanges the accumulated points of a predetermined size for a privilege. The privilege to be exchanged is an effect mode that can be presented by the effect control device 300. Further, the privilege to be exchanged is an effect mode not related to the game control device 100.

(2) The gaming machine 10 displays the selection operation display 900 on the display device 41. The selection operation display 900 includes a point game-related display 910 and a special figure game game display 914. The point game-related display 910 includes an operation guidance display 911 and an option display 912.

(3) The gaming machine 10 allows the player to select the privilege presented on the option display 912 by the option setting unit (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) 25.

(4) The gaming machine 10 can make the size of the number of points determined by the winning detection (passage detection) of the point gate 48 different depending on the gaming state.
(5) The gaming machine 10 is provided with a point gate 48 in the vicinity of a starting winning opening that triggers the start of a variable display game that can give a game value to the player in relation to the derived result mode.

(6) The gaming machine 10 is provided with a point gate 48 at a position where there is no chance of winning a prize in another winning opening.
[Modification 1 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modification of the point table of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example (modification example 1) of the point table of the first embodiment.

The point table (modification example 1) is data including the item "game state", the item "judgment value", and the item "additional points". The item "game state" includes the number of holds "0", the number of holds "1" to "4", the number of holds "5", "6", and the number of holds "", depending on the size of the number of holds of the special figure game. It is divided into "7" and "8". The maximum number of holdings for the special figure game is "8" from the number of holdings based on the first starting winning opening (maximum "4") and the number of holdings based on the second starting winning opening (maximum "4"). ".

The item "determination value" is a determination value corresponding to the lottery random number (for example, a uniform random number from "0" to "255") acquired in step D94. The item "additional points" indicates the item "game state" and the addition points corresponding to the item "judgment value". For example, the point table (modification example 1) indicates that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "250" in the game state corresponding to the number of holds "0", and is for lottery. When the random number is "251" to "254", the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "255", the addition point is "5". Further, the point table (modification example 1) shows that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "200" in the game state corresponding to the number of reservations "1" to "4". When the lottery random number is "201" to "250", the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "251" to "255", the addition point is "5". show. Further, the point table (modification example 1) shows that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "100" in the game state corresponding to the reserved numbers "5" and "6". When the lottery random number is "101" to "250", the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "251" to "255", the addition point is "5". show. Further, the point table (modification example 1) shows that the addition points are "5" when the lottery random numbers are from "0" to "255" in the game state corresponding to the reserved numbers "7" and "8". show. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by making the addition points different depending on the lottery random numbers even if the size of the reserved number is the same.

Further, in the point table (modification example 1), the size of the expected value of the addition points given in each size of the number of holds can be made different by making the judgment value for each size of the number of holds different. .. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by raising or lowering the expected value according to the size of the number of holdings. Further, the gaming machine 10 can motivate the player who interrupts the game to continue the game depending on the size of the number of reservations.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modification of the point table of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example (modification example 2) of the point table of the first embodiment.

The point table (modification example 2) is data including the item "game state", the item "judgment value", and the item "additional points". The item "game state" is classified into a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less, a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or less, a fluctuation time of more than 60 seconds, and no fluctuation according to the magnitude of the fluctuation display duration of the special figure game. The magnitude of the variable display duration of the special figure game is the variable display duration of the variable display game currently being executed.

The item "determination value" is a determination value corresponding to the lottery random number (for example, a uniform random number from "0" to "255") acquired in step D94. The item "additional points" indicates the item "game state" and the addition points corresponding to the item "judgment value". For example, the point table (modification example 2) shows that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "250" in the game state corresponding to the fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less, and is for lottery. When the random number is "251" to "254", the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "255", the addition point is "5". Further, the point table (modification example 2) shows that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "200" in the game state corresponding to the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or less, and is for lottery. When the random number is "201" to "250", the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "251" to "255", the addition point is "5". Further, the point table (modification example 2) shows that the addition point is "1" when the lottery random number is "0" to "100" in the game state corresponding to the fluctuation time of more than 60 seconds, and is for lottery. When the random number is "101" to "250", the addition point is "2", and when the lottery random number is "251" to "255", the addition point is "5". Further, the point table (modification example 2) shows that the addition point is "5" when the lottery random number is "0" to "255" in the game state corresponding to no change. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by making the addition points different depending on the lottery random numbers even if the magnitude of the variable display duration of the special figure game is the same.

Further, in the point table (modification example 2), by making the judgment value for each size of the variation display duration of the special figure game different, the expected value of the added points given in each size of the variation display duration is different. The size can be different. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the point game by raising or lowering the expected value according to the magnitude of the variation display duration. Further, the gaming machine 10 can motivate the player who interrupts the game to continue the game depending on the size of the variation display duration.

[Modification 3 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the privilege options and operation guidance displayed on the display device 41 by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example (modification example 3) of the privilege selection operation screen displayed on the display device of the first embodiment.

The selection operation display 901 is a display including privilege options and operation guidance displayed on the display device 41 by the gaming machine 10. The selection operation display 901 includes a point game-related display 920 and a special figure game game display 929. The point game-related display 920 is a display related to the point game, and includes an operation guidance display 924, a premium effect (point game privilege) option display 925, and a point cumulative value related display 921.

The operation guidance display 924 is a display that guides the player to the operation method related to the granting of the privilege of the point game by visual information such as characters, pictures, and icons. Further, the operation guide display 924 clearly indicates the option setting unit (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) 25 as the operation guide display 924a to guide the operation method.

The option display 925 displays options that can be selected as a privilege of the point game privilege. For example, the option display 925 displays the sound effect A, the sound effect B, and the sound effect C as the options for the sound effect, and displays the accumulated points required for exchanging each option as the exchange point display 926. Further, the option display 925 clearly displays the option being selected based on the operation input of the selection button switch 25a, or the option determined based on the operation input of the decision button switch 25b (the selected option explicit display or the decision option). Explicit display) Display 927. At this time, the option display 925 clearly indicates that the options that cannot be selected cannot be selected.

The point cumulative value related display 921 includes a pre-exchange point cumulative value display 922 that displays the point cumulative value before the award exchange and a post-exchange point cumulative value display 923 that displays the point accumulated value after the award exchange. The special figure game game display 929 is a display including at least a part of the display contents related to the game state of the special figure game displayed by the display device 41 before displaying the selection operation display 901.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the arrangement position of the point gate and the point display and the configuration of the gaming board surface. FIG. 114 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the second embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT. In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 360 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 360 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 360, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 360, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is provided in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp opening 39a on the left side side. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port (warp inlet) 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located directly above the start port distribution device 36, and the game ball guided to the warp outlet 39b can easily win a prize in the start port distribution device 36.

Further, a point gate 481 and a point display 491 are arranged on the lower left side of the starting winning opening 360 in the game area 32. By providing the point gate 481 in the vicinity of the starting winning opening 360, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to simultaneously observe the trigger for winning the starting winning slot 360 and the trigger for generating the point gate 481 winning. can. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the interest of the game by winning the point gate 481 even when the winning of the starting winning opening 360 is sparse. The interest of the game by winning the point gate 481 is to contribute to the reduction of the player's sense of loss and discomfort due to the lack of prizes in the starting prize opening 360, and to continue playing the game to the player. Can motivate you.

Further, the point gate 481 is provided at a position where there is no chance of winning a prize in the starting winning opening 360. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the chance of winning the point gate 481. Further, the point gate 481 is provided at a position where there is a chance of winning a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can have both a winning opportunity for the ordinary variable winning device 37 and a winning opportunity for the point gate 481. The game ball that has won the point gate 481 is detected by the point switch 48a (see FIG. 4). The point display 491 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and numerically displays the cumulative value of the number of points given when the point gate 481 wins detection (passage detection) in two digits. The cumulative value of the number of points is exchanged for a privilege at a predetermined opportunity and given to the player. As for the privilege given according to the cumulative value of the number of points, for example, there is an increase in the choices of the production mode. The player can select a desired effect mode by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the start winning opening 360, and launches the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and the pachinko and pachislot machine 10 is moved to the right gaming region. The game ball launched with the above is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115. The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the arrangement position of the point gate and the point display. FIG. 115 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

In the game board 3002, a point gate 482 and a point display 492 are arranged below the warp port 39a in the game area 32. Since the point gate 482 is provided in the vicinity of the warp opening 39a, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to simultaneously observe the trigger for the inflow of the game ball into the warp opening 39a and the trigger for the winning of the point gate 482. be able to. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the frequency of winning a prize at the point gate 482 and increase the value of the points by the inflow of the gaming ball into the warp opening 39a. Further, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the interest of the game by winning a prize at the point gate 482 even when the inflow of the gaming ball into the warp opening 39a is sparse. The interest of the game by winning the point gate 482 like this contributes to the reduction of the player's feeling of loss and discomfort due to the sparse inflow of the game ball into the warp opening 39a, and continues to the player. It can give motivation to play a game.

The point gate 482 is provided at a position where there is a chance of winning a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the starting opening sorting device 36. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can have both a winning opportunity for the ordinary variable winning device 37, a general winning opening 35, and a starting opening sorting device 36 and a winning opportunity for the point gate 482.

Further, since the point display 492 is located below the point gate 482, it is located in the field of view of the player chasing the game ball that has won the point gate 482. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perceive that the point gate 482 and the point display 492 are related to each other even if the point gate 482 and the point display 492 are separate bodies. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 not only provides a game that is easy for the player to understand, but is also freed from the restriction of arranging the point gate 482 and the point display 492 integrally, which improves the degree of freedom in design and contributes to cost reduction. do.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment and the third embodiment in the arrangement position of the point gate and the point display. FIG. 116 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fourth embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

The game board 3003 has a warp opening 39a arranged on the left side side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port (warp inlet) 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located directly above the start port distribution device 36, and the game ball guided to the warp outlet 39b can easily win a prize in the start port distribution device 36.

The game board 3003 arranges the point gate 483 in the flow path from the warp port 39a to the warp outlet 39b. For example, the point gate 483 is provided directly below the warp port 39a. The point gate 483 may use the point switch 48a as a gate type sensor or a flat type sensor. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the point switch 48a is a flat type sensor, the point switch 48a is a flat type sensor and can be provided on the rolling surface on the stage in the center case 40. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may detect the gaming ball rolling on the stage twice or more, and can provide the player with the expectation that the points given will increase as the number of rolling times increases. ..

Further, by providing the point gate 483 in the warp passage, the gaming machine 10 can win the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port distribution device 36 for one gaming ball and the expectation of the occurrence of the point gate 483 winning. Can be provided to the person. Further, since the gaming machine 10 uses the inflow of the gaming ball into the warp opening 39a as a winning condition for the point gate 483, the frequency of winning the prize at the point gate 483 can be reduced and the value of the points can be increased.

The point gate 483 is provided at a position where there is a chance of winning a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the starting opening sorting device 36. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can have both a winning opportunity for the ordinary variable winning device 37, a general winning opening 35, and a starting opening sorting device 36 and a winning opportunity for the point gate 483.

Further, since the point display 493 is located away from the point gate 483, it is difficult to put it in the field of view of the player chasing the game ball that has won the point gate 483. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can urge the player to look over the entire gaming board 3003. Therefore, the player can get an opportunity to look over the entire game board 3003 and feel the production mode that has been overlooked in the past.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment, the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment in the arrangement position of the point gate and the point display. FIG. 117 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fifth embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

In the game board 3004, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged on the left side side of the center case 40, and a point gate 484 and a point display 494 are arranged on the lower left side of the special variable winning device 38. .. For example, the point gate 484 is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning device 38 at a position where a game ball that misses the winning opportunity to the special variable winning device 38 can win a prize. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can draw the player's attention to the gaming ball that misses the winning opportunity to the special variable winning device 38. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to the reduction of the player's sense of loss and discomfort with respect to the gaming ball that missed the winning opportunity to the special variable winning device 38, and motivates the player to continue playing the game. Can be given.

Further, since the point display 494 is located directly under the point gate 484, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy for the player to win the game ball to the point gate 484 and update the accumulated point value accompanying the winning. You can check it.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment and the third to fifth embodiments in the arrangement position of the point gate and the point display. FIG. 118 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the sixth embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

In the game board 3005, the normal drawing start gate 34 is arranged on the left side side of the center case 40, and the point gate 485 is arranged on the lower left side of the normal drawing start gate 34. For example, the point gate 485 is in the vicinity of the normal drawing start gate 34. Normally, the pachinko starting gate 34 is in a region where the game balls flow down densely, and the gaming machine 10 provides the point gate 485 in the vicinity of the pachinko starting gate 34 to increase the chance of winning the point gate 485. Can be expected.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can obtain the interest of the point game in addition to the variable display game that also displays the display device 41.
Further, since the point display 495 is located away from the point gate 485, it is difficult to put it in the field of view of the player chasing the game ball that has won the point gate 485. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can urge the player to look over the entire gaming board 3005. Therefore, the player can get an opportunity to look over the entire game board 3005 and feel the production mode that has been overlooked in the past.

[7th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 125. The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the point game is updated with the accumulated point value and the privilege is given based on the progress of the variable display game. First, the variable display middle screen in the display device 41 of the seventh embodiment and the display of the point display 49 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. FIG. 119 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a variable display in-screen screen displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment and a display example of the point display. FIG. 120 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a variable display in-screen screen displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment and a display example of the point display. FIG. 121 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a variable display in-screen screen displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment and a display example of the point display. FIG. 122 is a diagram (No. 4) showing a variable display in-screen screen displayed on the display device of the seventh embodiment and a display example of the point display.

The variation display display screen 9301 shown in FIG. 119 (1a) shows the variation display display screen of the display device 41. The variable display middle screen 9301 includes a special figure game game display 930, a hold digestion display 931 and a hold display 932 as display contents. The special figure game game display 930 corresponds to the special figure game game display area in the display area. The special figure game game display 930 displays the variable display state of the special figure game by using the decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R. The variable display middle screen 9301 indicates that the decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R are changing, and indicates that the corresponding special figure game is in the variable display state.

The hold display 932 corresponds to the hold area in the display area. The hold display 932 clearly indicates the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game, and displays the hold storage display mode for each hold storage. For example, when the number of reserved storages in the special figure variation display game is "6", the reserved display 932 displays six reserved storages 932a, 932b, 932c, 932d, 932e, 932f. Further, the hold display 932 makes the display mode (hold memory display mode) of the hold memory 932c and the hold memory 932e different from the display modes of the hold memory 932a, 932b, 932c, 932d, 932e, 932f, and corresponds to the special figure variation display. Notify the degree of expectation for the result of the game.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify in advance the degree of expectation corresponding to the special figure variation display game scheduled to be variable display.
The reserved digestion display 931 corresponds to the reserved digestion area in the display area. The hold digestion display 931 displays the hold storage 931a at the time of hold storage corresponding to the special figure change display game during the change display. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the degree of expectation that the reserved memory corresponding to the special figure variable display game during the variable display is notified in advance by the reserved memory 931a even during the variable display.

The point cumulative value display 4911 shown in FIG. 119 (1b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 when the display device 41 is displaying the variable display display screen 9301. The point cumulative value display 4911 indicates that the point cumulative value is “2”.

The variation display display screen 9302 shown in FIG. 119 (2a) is a display screen after the variation display display screen 9301 in the display device 41, and shows the variation display display screen at the time of reach. The variable display middle screen 9302 indicates that the decorative symbols 930L and 930R are temporary stops for displaying "6" in the special figure game game display 930, and indicates that the decorative symbols 930C is changing. The variable display in-screen 9302 indicates that the decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R are in the reach state waiting for the decorative symbols 930L, 930C, and 930R to stop at "6" in the special figure game game display 930.

The point cumulative value display 4912 shown in FIG. 119 (2b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 when the display device 41 is displaying the variable display display screen 9302. The point cumulative value display 4912 indicates that the point cumulative value is “2”.

The variation display display screen 9303 shown in FIG. 120 (3a) is a display screen after the variation display display screen 9302 in the display device 41, and shows the variation display display screen at the time of reach. The variable display middle screen 9303 includes a special figure game game display 929, a hold digestion display 931, a hold display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The variable display middle screen 9303 displays the special figure game game display 929 instead of the special figure game game display 930. The special figure game game display 929 is a display area smaller than the special figure game game display 930, and displays a part or all of the information displayed by the special figure game game display 930. Further, the special figure game game display 929 is located in a corner of the display area.

The effect display 933 corresponds to the effect area in the display area. The effect display 933 is located in the center of the display area in place of the special figure game game display 930. The effect display 933 displays an effect corresponding to the special figure variation display game during the variation display. The effect display 933 displays, for example, characters 933a and 933b, and displays an effect in which the character 933a and the character 933b confront each other.

The point cumulative value display 4913 shown in FIG. 120 (3b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the variable display screen 9303. The point cumulative value display 4913 indicates that the point cumulative value is “2”.

The variation display display screen 9304 shown in FIG. 120 (4a) is a display screen after the variation display display screen 9303 in the display device 41, and shows the variation display display screen at the time of temporary stop. The variable display middle screen 9304 includes a special figure game game display 929, a hold digestion display 931, a hold display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The special figure game game display 929 indicates that the decorative symbols 929L and 929R are temporary stops for displaying "6", and indicates that the decorative symbols 929C are temporary stops for displaying "7".

The effect display 933 displays, for example, the characters 933a, 933b and the message "YOU LOSE ...", and displays an effect in which the character 933a loses the confrontation with the character 933b, that is, an unfavorable result for the player.

The point cumulative value display 4914 shown in FIG. 120 (4b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the variable display screen 9304. The point cumulative value display 4914 indicates that the point cumulative value is "2".

The variation display display screen 9305 shown in FIG. 121 (5a) is a display screen after the variation display display screen 9304 in the display device 41, and shows the variation display display screen at the time of temporary stop. The variable display middle screen 9305 includes a special figure game game display 930, a hold digestion display 931 and a hold display 932 as display contents. The variable display middle screen 9305 displays the special figure game game display 930 instead of the special figure game game display 929. The special figure game game display 930 indicates that the decorative symbols 930L and 930R are temporary stops displaying "6", and indicates that the decorative symbols 930C is a temporary stop displaying "7".

The point cumulative value display 4915 shown in FIG. 121 (5b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the variable display screen 9305. The point cumulative value display 4915 indicates that the point cumulative value is “2”.

The variation display in-screen 9306 shown in FIG. 121 (6a) is a display screen after the variation display in-screen 9305 in the display device 41, and shows the variation display in-screen at the time of re-variation. The variable display middle screen 9306 includes a special figure game game display 930, a hold digestion display 931 and a hold display 932 as display contents. The variable display middle screen 9306 indicates that the decorative symbols 930L and 930R are temporary stops for displaying "6" in the special figure game game display 930, and the decorative symbol 930C displays a special symbol "G" after re-variation. Indicates a temporary stop. A special symbol is a special symbol that does not appear during normal variable display. The special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. The state in which the decorative symbol 930C displays the special symbol "G" in the special symbol game game display 930 is a state that triggers the update of the accumulated point value to the maximum value in the point game.

The point cumulative value display 4916 shown in FIG. 121 (6b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the variable display screen 9306. The point cumulative value display 4916 indicates that the point cumulative value is "99". That is, the point cumulative value display 4916 indicates that the point cumulative value has been updated to the maximum value because the decorative symbol 930C displays the special symbol “G”.

The variation display display screen 9307 shown in FIG. 122 (7a) is a display screen after the variation display display screen 9306 in the display device 41, and shows the variation display display screen at the time of temporary stop. The variable display middle screen 9307 includes a special figure game game display 929, a hold digestion display 931, a hold display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The variable display middle screen 9307 displays the special figure game game display 929 instead of the special figure game game display 930. The variable display middle screen 9307 indicates that the decorative symbols 929L and 929R are temporary stops for displaying "6" in the special figure game game display 929, and the decorative symbol 929C displays a special symbol "G" after re-variation. Indicates a temporary stop.

The variable display middle screen 9307 includes a gacha display 934 and an operation guidance display 9241 in the effect display 933. The gacha display 934 is a lottery effect display using a so-called gacha (lottery machine). The gacha display 934 provides a gacha game as a privilege of the point game given to the player. Gacha games are a form of benefits such as video output and audio output that players can directly feel. The gacha display 934 includes a lottery ball explicit unit 9341, a lottery operation display unit 9342, and a lottery ball exit display unit 9343. The lottery ball explicit unit 9341 clearly indicates the lottery balls (934a, 934b, 934c, ...) To be the lottery target in advance, and guides the player of the lottery probability and possible lottery results. For example, when the lottery ball explicit unit 9341 specifies 10 lottery balls (934a, 934b, 934c, ...), The lottery ball explicit unit 9341 suggests that the lottery probability of a specific lottery ball is 1/10. do. Further, the lottery ball explicit unit 9341 suggests that the size of the expected value is different depending on the display mode (for example, color, size, shape, etc.) of the lottery ball 934a, the lottery ball 934b, and the lottery ball 934c. The lottery operation display unit 9342 displays a rotatable operation knob. The lottery ball exit display unit 9343 displays the exit of the lottery ball 934z obtained as a lottery result.

The operation guidance display 9241 is a display that guides the player to the operation (gacha operation) method related to the privilege granting of the point game by visual information such as characters, pictures, and icons. Further, the operation guide display 9241 clearly indicates the option setting unit (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) 25 as the operation guide display 924a to guide the operation method. For example, in the gacha operation, the selection button switch 25a accepts the stirring operation of the lottery ball specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341, and the decision button switch 25b accepts the taking-out operation of the lottery ball specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341. The effect display 933 receives the input of the selection button switch 25a and performs an effect display for stirring the lottery balls specified by the lottery ball explicit unit 9341, and receives the input of the decision button switch 25b and presses the operation knob on the lottery operation display unit 9342. A rotating effect display is performed, and an effect display is performed in which the lottery ball 934z obtained as a lottery result is taken out from the lottery ball exit display unit 9343.

The display mode of the lottery ball specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341 may be associated with the hold storage displayed by the hold display 932. In this case, the number of lottery balls and the display mode specified by the lottery ball specifying unit 9341 can be determined based on the number of hold memories displayed by the hold display 932 and the display mode. Further, the number of lottery in the gacha display 934 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In that case, the size of the number of lottery may be associated with the hold storage displayed by the hold display 932. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a motivation to increase the number of reserved memories. Such a gaming machine 10 can be expected to improve its operation.

Further, the display mode of the lottery balls specified by the lottery ball explicit unit 9341 may be associated with the size of the accumulated points before the maximum value is updated. According to this, the gaming machine 10 does not obtain the same result when the point cumulative value close to the maximum value is updated to the maximum value and when the point cumulative value far from the maximum value is updated to the maximum value. A sense of fairness can be alleviated. Such a gaming machine 10 can be expected to improve its operation.

The point cumulative value display 4917 shown in FIG. 122 (7b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the variable display screen 9307. The point cumulative value display 4917 indicates that the point cumulative value is “0”. That is, the point cumulative value display 4917 indicates that the point cumulative value has been reset with the start trigger of the effect relating to the granting of the privilege of the point game as the reset trigger of the point cumulative value.

The variation display display screen 9308 shown in FIG. 122 (8a) is a display screen after the variation display display screen 9307 in the display device 41, and shows the variation display display screen at the time of temporary stop. The variable display middle screen 9308 includes a special figure game game display 929, a hold digestion display 931, a hold display 932, and an effect display 933 as display contents. The variable display middle screen 9307 displays the special figure game game display 929 instead of the special figure game game display 930. The variable display middle screen 9307 indicates that the decorative symbols 929L and 929R are temporary stops for displaying "6" in the special figure game game display 929, and the decorative symbol 929C displays a special symbol "G" after re-variation. Indicates a temporary stop.

The variable display middle screen 9308 notifies the final lottery result using the lottery ball 934z obtained as the lottery result as the effect display 933. That is, the variable display middle screen 9307 corresponds to the expectation degree notification, and the variable display middle screen 9307 corresponds to the result notification. For example, the variable display in-screen 9308 includes the result notification display 935 in the display content of the effect display 933. In addition to the big hit, the result notification display 935 may notify a small hit, a latent probability change, a non-latent probability change, a time saving, a loss, or the like. After that, the variable display middle screen 9308 displays the result of the special figure game game (not shown).

The point cumulative value display 4918 shown in FIG. 122 (8b) shows the two-digit 7-segment LEDs 49a and 49b of the point display 49 on which the display device 41 is displaying the variable display screen 9308. The point cumulative value display 4918 indicates that the point cumulative value is “0”.

Next, the special symbol of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the special symbol of the seventh embodiment.
The special symbol is a symbol capable of notifying the degree of expectation for the result depending on the display mode, and is distinguished from a normal decorative symbol. The special symbol does not appear in the normal variable display, but appears in a specific case and has a role of notifying the player of the degree of expectation. For example, the gaming machine 10 has four types of special symbols, and the first special symbol is represented by superimposing a symbol "G" against a background of a balloon having a sawtooth-shaped outer shape, and a jackpot is notified. .. The second special symbol is represented by superimposing the symbol "G" on the background of the hexagonal outer shape, and the small hit is the notification target. The third special symbol is represented by superimposing the symbol "G" on the background of the circular outer shape, and the latent probability change is the notification target. The fourth special symbol is represented only by the symbol "G" without a background, and the loss is targeted for notification.

It should be noted that each special symbol does not necessarily have to notify the corresponding notification target as a definite result (for example, 100% jackpot), and notifies the corresponding notification target as stochastic certainty (for example, 50% jackpot). ) May be used. Further, each special symbol does not necessarily correspond to one notification target (for example, only a big hit), and may correspond to two or more notification targets (for example, a big hit and a small hit).

Further, each special symbol does not have to have a fixed notification target, and the notification target may be changed depending on the conditions. For example, one of the special symbols usually corresponds to a loss, but it may correspond to a big hit by applying an image effect. The image effect changes the display mode of a special symbol in a normal state, and includes, for example, a color change, a size change, and a deformation.

Next, the point control process and the point exchange process of the seventh embodiment will be described.
[Point control processing]
First, the point control process will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a flowchart of point control processing in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. The point control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 of the main process. The point control process of the seventh embodiment is common to the point control process of the first embodiment and the processes of steps D71 to D73, and differs in the processes after step D74.

[Step D71] The control unit executes the point initialization process.
[Step D72] The control unit executes the point update process.
[Step D73] The control unit executes the point exchange process.

[Step D74] The control unit executes the second point exchange process. The second point exchange process is a process of exchanging the accumulated value of the number of points for a gacha game (a privilege given to a player) at a predetermined opportunity. The second point exchange process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

[Step D75] The control unit determines whether or not the point update timer has timed up. The point update timer is a timer used to determine the timing for updating the accumulated point value to the maximum value, and the timer value is set in the second point exchange process. The control unit proceeds to step D76 when the point update timer is timed up, and proceeds to step D77 when the time is not up.

[Step D76] The control unit updates the accumulated points to the maximum value.
[Step D77] The control unit determines whether or not the point reset timer has timed up. The point reset timer is a timer used to determine the timing for resetting the accumulated point value, and the timer value is set in the second point exchange process. The control unit proceeds to step D78 when the time is up for the point reset timer, and ends the point control process when the time is not up.

[Step D78] The control unit resets the accumulated point value and ends the point control process.
[Second point exchange process]
Next, the second point exchange process will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a second point exchange process in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. The second point exchange process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the point control process. The second point exchange process is a process of exchanging the accumulated points for gacha games.

[Step D111] The control unit detects the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, and determines whether or not the detected special figure fluctuation display game corresponds to the gacha game. For example, the control unit can determine whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponds to the gacha game based on the type of the command received from the game control device 100 by the effect control device 300. Whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponds to the gacha game is determined by the type of command, the result derived by the special figure variation display game, and the variation time of the special figure variation display game (for example, the gacha game). (Sufficient fluctuation time) etc. can be used.

The control unit proceeds to step D112 when the special figure variation display game corresponds to the gacha game, and ends the second point exchange process when the special figure variation display game does not correspond to the gacha game.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires the gacha game fluctuation change condition. The gacha game fluctuation change condition is a condition for changing the special figure fluctuation display game that detects the start of fluctuation to the gacha game fluctuation. For example, the gacha game fluctuation change condition is a determination value when a random number lottery is performed. The gacha game fluctuation change condition may define a game state and a range of accumulated point values that enable the special figure fluctuation display game to be changed to a gacha game.

[Step D113] The control unit acquires a random number.
[Step D114] The control unit determines whether or not to change the gacha game variation based on the gacha game variation change condition and the random number. The control unit proceeds to step D115 when changing the gacha game variation, and ends the second point exchange process when the gacha game variation is not changed.

[Step D115] The control unit changes the effect display of the special figure variation display game to the gacha game variation. The gacha game variation is an effect display including the gacha game. For example, the control unit can change the effect display of the special figure variation display game to gacha game variation by replacing the content edited in the effect display editing process in step D23 of the main process. Further, the control unit may discard the content edited in the effect display editing process in step D23 of the main process and re-edit in the effect display editing process.

[Step D116] The control unit sets the point update timer. The timer value of the point update timer is determined according to the timing of the gacha game performed in the special figure fluctuation display game. The timer value of the point update timer may be set in advance according to the type of command.

[Step D117] The control unit sets a point reset timer. The timer value of the point reset timer is determined according to the timing of the gacha game performed in the special figure fluctuation display game. The timer value of the point reset timer may be set in advance according to the type of command. After setting the point reset timer, the control unit ends the second point exchange process.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is provided with a point gate 48 and a point display 49 on the front side. The point gate 48 includes a point switch 48a, and detects a game ball that has won (including passing) the point gate 48 by the point switch 48a. The gaming machine 10 determines a predetermined number of points triggered by the winning detection of the point gate 48 (detection of the gaming medium including passage detection). The gaming machine 10 calculates a point accumulation value obtained by accumulating the determined number of points in a predetermined period (including while in a predetermined state). The point display 49 displays the accumulated point value. The gaming machine 10 exchanges the accumulated points of a predetermined size for a privilege. The privilege to be exchanged is an effect mode that can be presented by the effect display device 300. Further, the privilege to be exchanged is an effect mode not related to the game control device 100.

(2) The gaming machine 10 changes the production mode of the variable display game as a privilege.
(3) The gaming machine 10 has a second point cumulative value updating means that does not depend on winning a prize at the point gate 48, and the point cumulative value is being displayed in a variable manner in the variable display game based on a predetermined attribute of the variable display game. The accumulated points will be updated and the accumulated points will be exchanged for special benefits.

(4) The predetermined attribute of the variable display game is the command type corresponding to the variable display game or the variable time of the variable display game as a result of deriving the variable display game.
[8th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment can execute a hold notice effect that changes the hold display mode of the start memory in relation to the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. The gaming machine 10 can use the opportunity to win a prize at a predetermined general winning opening as an opportunity to execute the hold notice effect. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of winning openings and the like in the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The same configuration as in the first embodiment will be described by using the same reference numerals.

The gaming machine 10 is housed in a storage unit (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 to include a game board 3006, and the upper plate 21 including the option setting unit 25, the operation unit 24, and the like are stored in the lower portion of the front frame 12. Prepare for.

The game board 3006 is provided with a display device 41 in the central portion of the game area 32, and a normal drawing start gate 34 is provided on the side right side of the display device 41. Further, in the game board 3006, the general winning opening 351 is arranged on the lower left side of the display device 41, and the general winning opening 352 is arranged on the lower right side of the display device 41. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by independent winning opening switches (for example, winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 3) and the like).

Further, the game board 3006 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) below the display device 41. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). Further, the game board 3006 is provided with a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) directly below the starting winning opening 36. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, the game board 3006 is provided with a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 below the display device 41 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

In the game machine 10, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the display device 41 is the left game area, and the area on the right side of the display device 41 is the right game area. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the player can aim for a prize in the start winning opening 360 or the general winning opening 351. By firing a ball (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, and the general winning opening 352.

The game control device 100 can notify the effect control device 300 of the winning in the various winning openings by detecting the winning in the various winning openings and issuing a predetermined command. Next, a command used for notification of winning at various winning openings will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of a model specification command list of the eighth embodiment.

The game control device 100 transmits a model specification command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A. The effect control device 300 receives the model specification command and performs a process related to the required hold notice effect (for example, a hold effect setting process described later with reference to FIG. 140).

The effect control device 300 can include the model specification command in the processing range of the single-shot command processing (see FIG. 103) in step D62 of the reception command analysis processing, and execute the processing corresponding to the received model specification command. ..

The model specification command (receive command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte).
The model specification commands include a large winning opening count command, a starting winning opening winning command, a general electric winning command, a general winning opening A winning command, and a general winning opening B winning command. The large winning opening count command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning a prize in the special variable winning device 38. The grand prize opening count command is designated by MODE "A7H" and ACTION "08H". The ACTION "08H" in the large winning opening count command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38, for example, eight. The start winning opening winning command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36. The start winning opening winning command is designated by MODE "A8H" and ACTION "04H". The ACTION "04H" in the start winning opening winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the starting winning opening 36, and is, for example, four. The Fuden winning command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory). The Fuden winning command is designated by MODE "A9H" and ACTION "01H". The ACTION "01H" in the Fuden winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the starting winning opening 36, and is, for example, one.

The general winning opening A winning command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning a prize in the general winning opening 351. The general winning opening A winning command is designated by MODE "AAH" and ACTION "03H". The ACTION "03H" in the general winning opening A winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 351 and is, for example, three. The general winning opening B winning command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning a prize in the general winning opening 352. The general winning opening B winning command is designated by MODE "ABH" and ACTION "05H". The ACTION "05H" in the general winning opening B winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 352, and is, for example, five.

The effect control device 300 can receive such a model specification command and detect winning in various winning openings. The effect control device 300 can receive the general winning opening A winning command among the model specification commands and use the winning of the general winning opening 351 as an opportunity to execute the hold notice effect.

Further, the effect control device 300 can also use the winning of the general winning opening 352 as an opportunity to execute the hold notice effect. The effect control device 300 can receive the general winning opening B winning command among the model specification commands and use the winning of the general winning opening 352 as an opportunity to execute the hold notice effect.

In addition, the effect control device 300 can switch the general winning opening that triggers the execution of the hold notice effect according to the game state. For example, the effect control device 300 can use the winning of the general winning opening 351 as a trigger for executing the hold notice effect in the left-handed gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state). In addition, the effect control device 300 can trigger the execution of the hold notice effect by winning a prize in the general winning opening 352 in a right-handed gaming state (for example, a normal electric support gaming state). In this way, the gaming machine 10 can use the model specification command to trigger the winning of the predetermined general winning opening as the execution trigger of the hold notice effect.

Next, the variable display screen in the display device of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the eighth embodiment.
The display screen 600 shown in FIG. 128 (1) is the display content of the display device 41 in which the symbol is stopped in the variable display game. The display screen 600 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 603, a special figure 2 hold number display 604, a hold display 605, and a hold digestion display 606 in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 601 as the first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as the second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 601 includes the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

Generally, the large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 601 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R, and waits for the stop of the middle symbol 601C to form a hit mode.

The symbols (left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C, and right symbol 601R) that make up the large symbol group 601 are mainly decorative symbols with high design. For example, the display screen 600 displays a boy-like character on a pentagonal frame-shaped outline as the left symbol 601L to ensure the discriminating power of the overall symbol, and displays the Chinese numeral "1" to ensure Guarantee the distinctiveness. Similarly, the display screen 600 displays a character like a tiger on the outline of a pentagonal frame as the left symbol 601C to secure the discriminating power of the symbol as a whole, and displays the Chinese numeral "three". And ensure reliable discriminating power. The display screen 600 displays a rocket-like character on the outline of a pentagonal frame as the left symbol 601R to secure the discriminating power of the symbol as a whole, and displays the Chinese numeral "5" for reliable identification. Secure power.

The small symbol group 602 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect of the large symbol group 601. The small symbol group 602 mainly includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol according to the decorative symbol C. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stopped state. For example, the display screen 600 displays the number "1" as the left symbol in the small symbol group 602, displays the number "3" as the middle symbol, and displays the number "5" as the right symbol.

In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 602 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 601 and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 602 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601 and facilitate the grasp of the gaming state of the player.

The special figure 1 hold number display 603 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. For example, the hold memory of the special figure 1 game is generated when a prize is entered in the start winning opening 36. The special figure 2 hold number display 604 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. For example, the hold memory of the special figure 2 game is generated when a prize is given to the ordinary variable winning device 37.

The hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The number of held storages displayed by the holding display 605 is either the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 1 holding number display 603 or the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 2 holding number display 604, depending on the game state. It corresponds to the total number of both.

The number of hold storages displayed by the hold display 605 is a value from "0" to "4", and the number of hold storages exceeding this value is excluded from the display target. Even if the hold display 605 excludes a part of the hold memory from the display target, the gaming machine 10 can guarantee the accurate display of the hold memory number by the special figure 1 hold number display 603 and the special figure 2 hold number display 604.

The hold digestion display 606 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform the hold notice effect by using the hold display 605 and the hold digestion display 606. The hold notice effect is an aspect of the look-ahead effect performed by using the hold display 605 and the hold digestion display 606.

On the display screen 600, the reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 603 is “0”, and the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 604 is “0”. Therefore, the number of hold storages indicated by the hold display 605 is also “0”. Further, the display screen 600 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped by the hold digestion display 606.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can have different modes of variation during the variation display for the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. For example, when the large symbol group 601 is vertically scrolled, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. Further, even if the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 asynchronously update the symbols, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the discomfort given to the player.

The display screen 608 shown in FIG. 128 (2) is the display content of the display device 41 during the symbol variation in the variation display game. On the display screen 608, the number of reserved memory of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 603 is "1", and the number of reserved stored games of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 604 is "0". Is. The hold display 605 is a gaming state in which the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 603 is displayed, and indicates the hold storage number “1” corresponding to the hold storage number “1” of the special figure 1 game. The hold display 605 indicates the number of hold storages by displaying a spherical shape on the pedestal corresponding to the number of hold storages.

Further, the display screen 608 indicates that the special figure variation display game is undergoing symbol variation by the hold digestion display 606. The hold digestion display 606 indicates that the hold digestion is in progress by displaying a spherical display larger than the hold digestion display 606 on the corresponding pedestal.

The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R of the display screen 608 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 608 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Next, the hold notice effect area for displaying the hold notice effect at the event trigger will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of an event-triggered hold notice effect region in the display device of the eighth embodiment.

On the display device 41, the gaming machine 10 can perform a hold notice effect at the opportunity of winning a prize at the general winning opening 351, that is, at the event. The display device 41 includes a large symbol group display area 611 and a hold notice effect area 612,613,614,615 on the display screen during variable display. The large symbol group display area 611 is located at a substantially central portion of the display device 41 and displays the large symbol group 601. The hold notice effect area 612, 613, 614, 615 displays the hold notice effect.

The hold notice effect area 612 is located at the lower left of the display area of the display device 41 and displays the hold notice effect (first notice display effect) which is the starting point in the display screen.
The hold notice effect area 613 displays the hold notice effect (second notice display effect), which is the first development form, in the display screen. The hold notice effect area 613 is located in the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41. Further, the hold notice effect area 613 partially overlaps with the hold notice effect area 612. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can show the relationship between the hold notice effect area 612 and the hold notice effect area 613.

The hold notice effect area 614 displays the hold notice effect (third notice display effect), which is the second development form, in the display screen. The hold notice effect area 614 is in a range excluding the left end portion of the display area and the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41. The hold notice effect area 614 partially overlaps with the hold notice effect area 613. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can show the relationship between the hold notice effect area 613 and the hold notice effect area 614.

The hold notice effect area 615 displays the hold notice effect (final notice display effect) which is the third development form in the display screen. The hold notice effect area 615 is located below the display area of the display device 41. The hold notice effect area 615 partially overlaps with the hold notice effect area 614. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can show the relationship between the hold notice effect area 614 and the hold notice effect area 615. Further, the hold notice effect area 615 overlaps a part or all of the hold display 605 and the hold digestion display 606. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can show the relationship between the hold notice effect area 615 and the hold display 605, or the relationship between the hold notice effect area 615 and the hold digestion display 606.

Further, the gaming machine 10 arranges a general winning opening 351 below the display device 41 on the gaming board 3006. The general winning opening 351 and the hold notice production area 612 are lined up on a vertical line. The general winning opening 351 is outside the display area of the display device 41 and is provided with a hold notice effect area 610. The hold notice effect area 610 displays a hold notice effect (general winning opening notice display effect) that is the starting point outside the display screen. The hold notice effect area 610 is aligned vertically with the hold notice effect area 612. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can show the relationship between the hold notice effect area 610 and the hold notice effect area 612.

The general winning opening 351 has an indicator light 351L (for example, an LED). The effect control device 300 sets the indicator lamp 351L as a required lighting mode in the wake of the winning detection of the game ball 351y to the general winning opening 351. The effect control device 300 can perform a general winning opening notice display effect depending on the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 351L.

The effect control device 300 can take over the hold notice effect in the hold notice effect area 610 to the hold notice effect in the subsequent hold notice effect area 612. Further, the effect control device 300 can take over the hold notice effect in the hold notice effect area 612 to the hold notice effect in the subsequent hold notice effect area 613. The effect control device 300 can take over the hold notice effect in the hold notice effect area 613 to the hold notice effect in the subsequent hold notice effect area 614. The effect control device 300 can take over the hold notice effect in the hold notice effect area 614 to the hold notice effect in the subsequent hold notice effect area 615.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a multi-step (for example, five-step) hold notice effect. Then, the gaming machine 10 gives each hold notice effect a relevance based on the arrangement position of the hold notice effect area, so that the player can easily understand the multi-stage hold notice effect. The gaming machine 10 performs such a multi-stage hold notice effect with a launch fireworks as a motif. The hold notice effect using the fireworks as a motif is an example, and other motifs may be used. By configuring the hold notice effect in multiple stages, the gaming machine 10 can give the hold notice effect in the previous stage a character as a lively effect. The lively production is a production that changes the production so that it does not become monotonous.

Next, the mode of each hold notice effect will be described. First, the general winning opening notice display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the lighting mode of the indicator lamp and the degree of expectation in the general winning opening notice display effect of the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 performs a general winning opening notice display effect depending on the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L. The effect control device 300 can use the reception of the general winning opening A winning command, that is, the detection of winning in the general winning opening 351 as an opportunity to execute the general winning opening notice display effect. Since the general winning opening notice display effect constitutes a part of the hold notice effect, the detection of winning the general winning opening 351 can be regarded as one of the execution triggers of the hold notice effect.

The general prize opening notice display production is in charge of the production corresponding to the launch cylinder among the hold notice productions with the motif of the fireworks. In the gaming machine 10, the general winning opening 351 is regarded as a launching cylinder, and the winning of a game ball into the general winning opening 351 is regarded as the loading of a ball (fireworks), and the indicator light 351L is turned on to produce the firing.

The lighting modes of the indicator lamp 351L are from pattern P10 to pattern P15. Pattern P10 is a white lighting mode for a predetermined period (for example, 256 ms). Pattern P11 is a blue lighting mode for a predetermined period (for example, 256 ms). Pattern P12 is a green lighting mode for a predetermined period (for example, 256 ms). Pattern P13 is a red lighting mode for a predetermined period (for example, 512 ms). Pattern P14 is a cherry-colored lighting mode for a predetermined period (for example, 512 ms). Pattern P15 is a rainbow-colored lighting mode for a predetermined period (for example, 512 ms). For example, as for the lighting mode of the rainbow color, the seven colors constituting the rainbow color may be sequentially switched within a predetermined period, or the three or four colors may be pseudo-switched.

Expectations (for example, hit expectations) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game are set in each of the patterns P10 to P15. The degree of expectation is not limited to the one corresponding to the derivability of winning, and may correspond to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach and super reach. In addition, the general winning opening notice display effect may be one that notifies the expectation degree independently of the hold notice effect of another stage, or one that notifies the expectation degree in combination with the hold notice effect of another stage. It may be.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation in the pattern P10, sets the highest expectation in the pattern P15, and sets the expectation that gradually increases from the pattern P10 to the pattern P15. The gaming machine 10 may have a specific expectation level of, for example, 0% to 100% set from the pattern P10 to the pattern P15, and may be, for example, "low", "medium", or "high". As such, it may set a rough degree of expectation.

Since the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the hold notice effect in the previous stage, the game machine 10 gives the general winning opening notice display effect a character as a lively effect. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 frequently selects a display mode (for example, pattern P10 or pattern P11) in which a low expectation level is set in the general winning opening notice display effect, and entrusts the expectation level notification to the hold notice effect in the subsequent stage. , A display mode in which a high degree of expectation is set (for example, patterns P12 to P15) is selected infrequently, and the expectation degree notification is set as a rare effect.

The general prize opening notice display effect is connected to the first notice display effect to continue the hold notice effect, but the hold notice effect is performed with the general prize opening notice display effect without connecting to the first notice display effect. It may be the one that ends.

Next, the first notice display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the first notice display effect of the eighth embodiment.
The first notice display effect is an effect executed in the hold notice effect area 612. The first notice display effect is a hold notice effect that is located after the general prize opening notice display effect and is the starting point in the display screen. The first notice display production is in charge of the production corresponding to the tail drawn by the fireworks among the hold notice productions with the motif of fireworks.

The display modes in the first notice display effect are from pattern P20 to pattern P25. The pattern P20 is a display mode in which the fireworks have a thin white tail. Pattern P21 is a display mode in which the fireworks have a thin blue tail. Pattern P22 is a display mode in which the fireworks have a thick green tail. Pattern P23 is a display mode in which the fireworks have a thick red tail. The pattern P24 is a display mode in which the fireworks have a gorgeous cherry-colored tail. Pattern P25 is a display mode in which the fireworks have a gorgeous rainbow-colored tail.

Expectations (for example, hit expectations) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game are set in each of the patterns P20 to P25. The degree of expectation is not limited to the one corresponding to the derivability of winning, and may correspond to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach and super reach. In addition, the first notice display effect may notify the expectation degree independently of the hold notice effect of another stage, or may notify the expectation degree in combination with the hold notice effect of another stage. There may be.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation in the pattern P20, sets the highest expectation in the pattern P25, and sets the expectation that gradually increases from the pattern P20 to the pattern P25. The gaming machine 10 may have a specific expectation level of, for example, 0% to 100% set from the pattern P20 to the pattern P25, and may be, for example, "low", "medium", or "high". As such, it may set a rough degree of expectation.

Since the gaming machine 10 is an effect that serves as a starting point in the display screen, it gives the first notice display effect a character as a lively effect. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 frequently selects a display mode (for example, pattern P20 or pattern P21) in which a low expectation is set in the first notice display effect, and entrusts the expectation notification to the hold notice effect in the subsequent stage. A display mode in which a high degree of expectation is set (for example, patterns P22 to P25) is selected infrequently, and the expectation degree notification is set as a rare effect.

The first notice display effect is connected to the second notice display effect to continue the hold notice effect, but the hold notice effect ends with the first notice display effect without connecting to the second notice display effect. It may be a thing.

Next, the second notice display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 shows (1) an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation, (2) an example of the display position in the hold notice effect area, and (3) the display mode in the second notice display effect of the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the change of.

The second notice display effect is an effect executed in the hold notice effect area 613. The first notice display effect is a hold notice effect that is located after the general prize opening notice display effect and is the starting point in the display screen. The second notice display production is in charge of the production of fireworks opening among the pending notice productions with the motif of fireworks.

The display modes in the second notice display effect are from pattern P30 to pattern P32. The pattern P30 is a display mode in which the fireworks 621 opens at a low position in the hold notice effect area 613. The pattern P31 is a display mode in which the fireworks 621 opens at the middle position in the hold notice effect area 613. The pattern P32 is a display mode in which the fireworks 621 opens at a high position in the hold notice effect area 613.

The display mode in which the fireworks 621 is opened changes from the fireworks 621a to the fireworks 621b and the fireworks 621c over a predetermined time. In the display mode of the fireworks 621, since the hold notice effect area 613 overlaps with the large symbol group display area 611, a gap 622 is provided in the fireworks 621c so that the visibility of the large symbol group 611 is not hindered for a predetermined period.

The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to display at most one fireworks 621 at each of the low position, the middle position, and the high position in the hold notice effect area 613. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to display three fireworks 621 at the same time in the hold notice effect area 613. For example, when the game machine 10 performs the second notice display effect when no fireworks 621 are displayed in the hold notice effect area 613, the game machine 10 selects one of the low position, the middle position, and the high position. Display fireworks 621. Further, when the game machine 10 adds the second notice display effect when one fireworks 621 is displayed at the low position in the hold notice effect area 613, either the middle position or the high position is selected. Fireworks 621 is additionally displayed. Further, when the game machine 10 adds the second notice display effect when the fireworks 621 are displayed in each of the low position and the middle position in the hold notice effect area 613, the game machine 10 selects the high position to display the fireworks 621. Display additional. Further, the gaming machine 10 does not add the second notice display effect when the fireworks 621 are displayed in all of the low position, the middle position, and the high position in the hold notice effect area 613 (additional restriction or addition prohibition). ).

Since the gaming machine 10 limits the number of effects that are simultaneously generated by the second notice display effect, the game machine 10 does not notify the expectation level (for example, the hit expectation level) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game in the second notice display effect. .. That is, the gaming machine 10 does not set the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game from the pattern P30 to the pattern P32.

The second notice display effect is connected to the third notice display effect to continue the hold notice effect, but the hold notice effect ends with the second notice display effect without connecting to the third notice display effect. It may be a thing.

Next, the third notice display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. The third notice display effect is an effect executed in the hold notice effect area 614. The third notice display effect is a hold notice effect starting from the fireworks 621 displayed in the second notice display effect in the subsequent stage of the second notice display effect. The third notice display production is in charge of the production corresponding to the parachute that appears from the fireworks among the hold notice productions with the motif of fireworks.

In the third notice display effect, the expectation level notification is produced by the display mode of the parachute 625 umbrella and the weight. In addition, the third notice display effect guides the reserved memory (including during digestion) that is the target of the expectation notification by the movement display mode of the parachute 625.

First, the expectation notification by the display mode of the parachute 625 and the weight will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the third notice display effect of the eighth embodiment.

The display modes in the third notice display effect are from pattern P40 to pattern P44. In the pattern P40, the umbrella and the weight of the parachute 625 are displayed in blue, respectively. In the pattern P41, the umbrella and the weight of the parachute 625 are displayed in green, respectively. In the pattern P42, the umbrella and the weight of the parachute 625 are displayed in red, respectively. In the pattern P43, the umbrella and the weight of the parachute 625 are each displayed in a cherry blossom pattern. In the pattern P44, the umbrella and the weight of the parachute 625 are displayed in rainbow colors, respectively.

Expectations (for example, hit expectations) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game are set in each of the patterns P40 to P44. The degree of expectation is not limited to the one corresponding to the derivability of winning, and may correspond to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach and super reach. In addition, the third notice display effect may notify the expectation degree independently of the hold notice effect of another stage, or may notify the expectation degree in combination with the hold notice effect of another stage. There may be.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation in the pattern P40, sets the highest expectation in the pattern P44, and sets the expectation that gradually increases from the pattern P40 to the pattern P44. The gaming machine 10 may have a specific expectation level of, for example, 0% to 100% set from the pattern P40 to the pattern P44, and may be, for example, "low", "medium", or "high". As such, it may set a rough degree of expectation.

Next, the movement display mode of the parachute 625 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of the movement display mode and the notification target guidance in the third notice display effect of the eighth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 displays the parachute 625 in the third notice display effect, contacts the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606, and continues the notice display effect from the third notice display effect to the final notice display effect. do.

The parachute 625 appears from the display position of the fireworks 621 in the hold notice effect area 614. The parachute 625 moves in the hold notice effect area 614 to reach the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606, or disappears out of the display area without reaching the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606.

When the target of the expectation notification by the parachute 625 is the hold memory during digestion, the effect control device 300 reaches the hold digestion display 606 through the pass p1 and contacts the spherical display located on the pedestal of the hold digestion display 606. And disappear. At this time, the effect control device 300 makes the display mode of the spherical display located on the pedestal of the hold digestion display 606 the same as the display mode of the parachute 625.

When the target of the expectation notification by the parachute 625 is the hold storage corresponding to the hold storage number "1", the effect control device 300 reaches the hold display 605 through the pass p2, and the hold display 605 holds the hold storage number "1". It comes into contact with the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to "" and disappears. At this time, the effect control device 300 makes the display mode of the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to the reserved storage number "1" the same as the display mode of the parachute 625.

When the target of the expectation notification by the parachute 625 is the hold storage corresponding to the hold storage number "2", the effect control device 300 reaches the hold display 605 through the pass p3, and the hold display 605 holds the hold storage number "2". It comes into contact with the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to "" and disappears. At this time, the effect control device 300 makes the display mode of the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to the reserved storage number "2" the same as the display mode of the parachute 625.

When the target of the expectation notification by the parachute 625 is the hold storage corresponding to the hold storage number “3”, the effect control device 300 reaches the hold display 605 through the pass p4, and the hold display 605 holds the hold storage number “3”. It comes into contact with the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to "" and disappears. At this time, the effect control device 300 makes the display mode of the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to the reserved storage number "3" the same as the display mode of the parachute 625.

When the target of the expectation notification by the parachute 625 is the hold storage corresponding to the hold storage number “4”, the effect control device 300 reaches the hold display 605 through the pass p5, and the hold display 605 holds the hold storage number “4”. It comes into contact with the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to "" and disappears. At this time, the effect control device 300 makes the display mode of the spherical display located on the pedestal corresponding to the reserved storage number "4" the same as the display mode of the parachute 625.

The effect control device 300 disappears out of the display area through the pass p6 when there is no target of the expectation notification by the parachute 625.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 can associate the expectation level notified by the parachute 625 with the reserved memory during digestion. Further, the gaming machine 10 can associate the expectation degree notified by the parachute 625 with the hold storage corresponding to the number of hold storages.

Note that paths p1 to pass p6 share a starting point n0 to an intermediate point n1, paths p2 to pass p6 share an intermediate point n1 to an intermediate point n2, and paths p3 to pass p6 share an intermediate point n2 to an intermediate point n3. Shared, paths p4 to p6 share an intermediate point n3 to an intermediate point n4, and paths p5 and p6 share an intermediate point n4 to an intermediate point n5. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can perform an effect of sequentially narrowing down the target of the expectation level notification in the process of moving and displaying the parachute 625.

The effect control device 300 brings the parachute 625 displayed in the third notice display effect into contact with the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606, and continues the notice display effect from the third notice display effect to the final notice display effect. ..

The final notice display effect is an effect executed in the hold notice effect area 615. The final notice display effect is a hold notice effect that is after the third notice display effect and is the end point of the parachute 625 displayed in the third notice display effect. The final notice display effect is a hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606 changes due to contact with the parachute 625. The relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the final notice display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the final notice display effect of the eighth embodiment. Although the display mode of the hold display will be described, the same can be applied to the display mode of the hold digestion display.

The display modes of the hold display are from pattern P50 to pattern P57. The pattern P50 and the pattern P51 are default (standard) display modes, for example, circular and white display modes. The pattern P50 is a display mode (non-latent) relating to the hold memory for which the hold notice effect is not scheduled. The pattern P51 is a display mode (latent A) relating to the hold memory for which the hold notice effect is scheduled.

The pattern P52 is a non-default (non-standard) display mode, for example, a circular and white blinking display mode. The pattern P52 is a display mode (latent B) relating to the hold memory for which the hold notice effect is scheduled.

Both the pattern P51 and the pattern P52 relate to the hold memory for which the hold notice effect is scheduled, but the pattern P51 does not reveal that the hold notice effect is scheduled, and the pattern P52 is scheduled for the hold notice effect. It differs in clarifying that.

The pattern P53 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and blue display mode. The pattern P54 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and green display mode. The pattern P55 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and red display mode. The pattern P56 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and cherry blossom pattern display mode. The pattern P57 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and rainbow-colored display mode.

Expectations (for example, hit expectations) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game are set in each of the patterns P53 to P57. The degree of expectation is not limited to the one corresponding to the derivability of winning, and may correspond to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach and super reach. In addition, the general winning opening notice display effect may be one that notifies the expectation degree independently of the hold notice effect of another stage, or one that notifies the expectation degree in combination with the hold notice effect of another stage. It may be.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation in the pattern P53, sets the highest expectation in the pattern P57, and sets the expectation that gradually increases from the pattern P53 to the pattern P57. The gaming machine 10 may have a specific expectation level of, for example, 0% to 100% set from the pattern P53 to the pattern P57, and may be, for example, "low", "medium", or "high". As such, it may set a rough degree of expectation.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a multi-stage hold notice effect on the occasion of winning a prize in the general winning opening 351. Since the gaming machine 10 performs the hold notice effect when the general winning opening 351 is won, there is no opportunity to perform the hold notice effect unless the general winning opening 351 is won. Therefore, when the general winning opening 351 has not won a prize for a predetermined period, the gaming machine 10 can perform a hold notice effect triggered by the time-up of the monitoring timer. The gaming machine 10 prepares a timer advance notice effect as a hold notice effect triggered by the time-up of the monitoring timer.

Next, the hold notice effect area for displaying the hold notice effect triggered by the timer will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a hold notice effect area of a timer trigger in the display device of the eighth embodiment.

On the display device 41, the gaming machine 10 can perform a hold notice effect when the time of the monitoring timer is up, that is, when the timer is triggered. The display device 41 includes a large symbol group display area 611 and a hold notice effect area 615 and 626 on the display screen during variable display. The large symbol group display area 611 is located at a substantially central portion of the display device 41 and displays the large symbol group 601. The hold notice effect areas 615 and 626 display the hold notice effect.

The hold notice effect area 626 is located in the lower part of the display area of the display device 41 and displays the hold notice effect (timer notice display effect) which is the starting point in the display screen. The effect control device 300 causes the character 627 to appear from the right end of the hold notice effect area 626 and moves and displays it toward the left side.

The effect control device 300 causes the character 627 to disappear out of the display area through the pass p11 when the hold notice effect is performed triggered by the time-up of the monitoring timer. The character 627 is a character that imitates a fireworks ball, and the gaming machine 10 wipes out the character 627 to the lower left end to produce fireworks launch preparation, and from the timer advance notice display effect to the first notice display effect. Connect the hold notice effect to.

The effect control device 300 moves the character 627 out of the display area through the pass p12 when the hold advance notice effect is not performed when the monitoring timer time is up, that is, when the timer advance notice display effect is given a character as a lively effect. Make it disappear. By wiping out the character 627 to the left end, the game machine 10 produces a failure to prepare for launching fireworks, and performs a lively effect in a variable display game.

The pass p11 and the pass p12 share an intermediate point n10 from the right end of the hold notice effect area 626. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can perform the pros and cons of continuing to the first notice display effect in the process of moving and displaying the character 627.

Next, the mode of the timer advance notice display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the character display mode and the degree of expectation in the timer advance notice display effect of the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 performs a timer advance notice display effect according to the display mode of the character 627. The effect control device 300 can use the time-up of the monitoring timer as an opportunity to execute the timer advance notice display effect. Since the timer notice display effect constitutes a part of the hold notice effect, the time-up of the monitoring timer can be regarded as one of the execution triggers of the hold notice effect.

The timer notice display production is in charge of the production that replaces the launch cylinder among the hold notice productions with the motif of launch fireworks. The gaming machine 10 directs the loading of balls (fireworks) by disappearing the character 627 from the lower left end to the outside of the display area.

The display modes of the character 627 are from pattern P60 to pattern P65. The pattern P60 is a display mode of a white shaku ball. The pattern P61 is a display mode of a blue scale ball. The pattern P62 is a display mode of a green 2-inch ball. The pattern P63 is a display mode of a red 2-inch ball. The pattern P64 is a display mode of a cherry blossom-patterned 2-inch ball. The pattern P65 is a display mode of a rainbow-colored 3-inch ball.

Expectations (for example, hit expectations) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game are set in each of the patterns P60 to P65. The degree of expectation is not limited to the one corresponding to the derivability of winning, and may correspond to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach and super reach. In addition, the general winning opening notice display effect may be one that notifies the expectation degree independently of the hold notice effect of another stage, or one that notifies the expectation degree in combination with the hold notice effect of another stage. It may be.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation in the pattern P60, sets the highest expectation in the pattern P65, and sets the expectation that gradually increases from the pattern P60 to the pattern P65. The gaming machine 10 may have a specific expectation level of, for example, 0% to 100% set from the pattern P60 to the pattern P65, and may be, for example, "low", "medium", or "high". As such, it may set a rough degree of expectation.

Since the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the hold notice effect in the previous stage, the game machine 10 gives the timer notice display effect a character as a lively effect. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 frequently selects a display mode (for example, pattern P60 or pattern P61) in which a low expectation level is set in the timer notice display effect, and entrusts the hold notice effect in the subsequent stage with the high expectation level. A display mode in which the expectation degree is set (for example, patterns P62 to P65) is selected at low frequency, and the expectation degree notification is set as a rare effect.

Next, the relationship between the general winning opening A winning and the hold notice production will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the relationship between the general winning opening A winning and the hold notice effect of the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 limits the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect triggered by the detection of winning in the general winning opening A (general winning opening 351). For example, it is assumed that the gaming machine 10 detects winning in the general winning opening A at timings t1, t2, t3, and t4, respectively. At this time, the gaming machine 10 executes the hold notice effect (A1) at the timing t1, executes the hold notice effect (A2) at the timing t2, and executes the hold notice effect (A3) at the timing t3. When the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the general winning opening A winning detection is restricted to three at the same time, the gaming machine 10 has the hold notice effect (A1), the hold notice effect (A2), and the hold notice effect (A2) from timing t3 to timing t5. And since the hold notice effect (A3) is being executed at the same time, the execution of the new hold notice effect is restricted. The gaming machine 10 allows the execution of a new hold notice effect if the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect is less than 3. For example, the gaming machine 10 executes the hold notice effect (A4) at the timing t6.

The gaming machine 10 may set the limit on the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect to a fixed value or a variable value. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect is set to "3" in the normal game state, and the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect is set to "2" or "4" in the specific game state with the normal electric support. May be good. Further, in the normal game state, the gaming machine 10 may change the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect according to the game state, such as the number of hold memories, the game time (output value of RTC338, operating amount, etc.). ) May be changed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 gives a hold notice during one variation display (variation display of the Nth rotation), such as the hold notice effect (A1), the hold notice effect (A2), and the hold notice effect (A3). Not limited to the case of starting and ending, as in the hold notice effect (A4), the hold notice is started across the two fluctuation displays (the fluctuation display of the Nth rotation and the fluctuation display of the N + 1th point). It may be the one that ends. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can execute the hold notice effect independently of the hold shift at the timing t7.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, since the general winning opening A winning detection is a stochastic event, the general winning opening A winning detection may not occur for a long period of time. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 activates the monitoring timer at each general winning opening A winning detection timing that triggered the execution of the hold notice effect, and monitors the time-up of the monitoring period WT. The gaming machine 10 resets the monitoring timer when the general winning opening A winning detection, which triggered the execution of the hold notice effect. As a result, the monitoring period WT corresponds to the non-detection period of the general winning opening A winning.

For example, the gaming machine 10 activates the monitoring timer at timings t1, t2, t3, t4, and t6. Of these, the monitoring timer started at timing t1 is reset at timing t2, the monitoring timer started at timing t2 is reset at timing t3, and the monitoring timer started at timing t3 is reset at timing t4. , The monitoring timer started at timing t4 is reset at timing t6. The monitoring timer activated at the timing t6 times up at the timing t8 and executes the hold notice effect (B). The hold notice effect (B) is a hold notice effect triggered by a timer.

The hold notice effect (B) may be connected to the first notice display effect from the timer notice display effect, or may not be connected to the first notice display effect. The gaming machine 10 determines the size of the monitoring period WT, the connection probability from the timer advance notice display effect to the first notice display effect, the game state, the number of reserved memories, the game time (RTC338 output value, operating amount, etc.), etc. It may be changed according to.

Further, when the pachinko / pachislot machine 10 performs the hold notice effect of the hold shift trigger, the size of the monitoring period WT and the connection probability from the timer notice display effect to the first notice display effect are determined by the occurrence of the hold shift advance notice effect. It may be changed according to the rate. For example, when the occurrence rate of the hold notice effect of the hold shift trigger is low (R1: including the occurrence rate “0”), the gaming machine 10 reduces the size of the monitoring period WT (for example, WT1) and holds the shift. When the occurrence rate of the hold notice effect of the opportunity is high (R2 (> R1)), the size of the monitoring period WT is increased (for example, WT2> WT1). Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the occurrence rate of the hold notice effect of the hold shift trigger is low (R1: including the occurrence rate “0”), the connection probability from the timer notice display effect to the first notice display effect is large. When the occurrence rate of the hold notice effect of the hold shift trigger is high (R2 (> R1)), the connection probability from the timer notice display effect to the first notice display effect is reduced (for example, R3). For example, R4 <R3). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the execution frequency of the hold notice effect independent of the hold shift to an appropriate range.

Next, the hold effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold effect setting process of the eighth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is a process of determining the establishment of the execution trigger of the hold notice effect and setting the effect content when the hold notice effect is to be performed. The hold effect setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The hold effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 101) of the main process.

[Step D121] The control unit acquires the game state.
[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not there is a prize in the general winning opening corresponding to the acquired gaming state. The general winning opening corresponding to the gaming state is the general winning opening 351 in the gaming state corresponding to the left-handed game (for example, the normal gaming state), and the gaming state corresponding to the right-handed game (for example, the probability that there is a general electric support). It is a general winning opening 352 in the variable game state and the time saving variable game state). The control unit proceeds to step D123 when there is no winning in the general winning opening corresponding to the acquired gaming state, and proceeds to step D124 when there is a winning in the general winning opening corresponding to the acquired gaming state.

[Step D123] The control unit determines whether or not the monitoring timer used for determining the execution trigger of the timer advance notice display effect has timed up. The control unit proceeds to step D124 when the monitoring timer has timed up, and ends the hold effect setting process when the monitoring timer has not timed up.

[Step D124] The control unit determines whether or not the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect is within the limit. The control unit proceeds to step D125 when the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect is within the limit, and ends the hold effect setting process when the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect exceeds the limit.

[Step D125] The control unit executes the hold effect selection process. The hold effect selection process is a process of determining a specific effect content in the hold notice effect. The details of the hold effect selection process will be described with reference to FIG. 140. The control unit ends the hold effect setting process after executing the hold effect selection process.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the hold notice effect within the range of the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect, triggered by the winning of the general winning opening or the time-up of the monitoring timer.

Next, the hold effect selection process will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold effect selection process of the eighth embodiment. The hold effect selection process is a process of determining a specific effect content in the hold notice effect. The hold effect selection process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The hold effect selection process is a process executed by the control unit in step D125 (see FIG. 139) of the hold effect setting process.

[Step D131] The control unit acquires the hold storage information. The hold storage information includes information that can specify the number of hold storages and information that can specify the hold storage that is the target of the look-ahead effect.
[Step D132] The control unit determines whether the execution trigger of the hold notice effect is a general winning opening winning or a monitoring timer time-up (timer). The control unit proceeds to step D133 when the execution trigger of the hold notice effect is the general winning opening winning, and proceeds to step D134 when the monitoring timer time is up.

[Step D133] The control unit determines the general winning opening notice display effect based on the hold storage information. For example, the control unit determines one of the lighting modes from the pattern P10 to the pattern P15 using the lottery table selected based on the hold storage information.

[Step D134] The control unit determines the timer advance notice display effect based on the hold storage information. For example, the control unit determines one of the display modes from the pattern P60 to the pattern P65 using the lottery table selected based on the reserved storage information.

[Step D135] The control unit determines whether or not to connect from the timer notice display effect to the first notice display effect and continue the hold notice effect. The control unit proceeds to step D136 when connecting from the timer notice display effect to the first notice display effect, and ends the hold effect selection process when not connecting to the first notice display effect.

[Step D136] The control unit determines the first notice display effect based on the hold storage information. For example, the control unit determines one of the display modes from the pattern P20 to the pattern P25 using the lottery table selected based on the reserved storage information.

[Step D137] The control unit determines the second notice display effect based on the pending notice effect being executed. For example, the control unit determines a display mode that does not collide with the pending advance notice effect being executed from among the patterns P30 to P32.

[Step D138] The control unit determines the hold memory (including during digestion) to be the notice display effect based on the hold memory information.
[Step D139] The control unit determines the third notice display effect based on the hold storage information. Specifically, the control unit determines the path of the parachute 625 with the hold memory determined in step D138 as the notice display effect target. For example, when the second reserved memory is set as the advance notice display effect target, the control unit determines the path p3 as the movement path of the parachute 625. Further, the control unit determines one of the patterns P50 to P57 as the display mode of the notice display effect target by using the lottery table selected based on the hold storage information. After determining the third notice display effect, the control unit ends the hold effect selection process.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform the hold notice effect according to the determined effect content. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a hold notice effect at a timing independent of the start winning opening winning and the hold shift, and can raise the player's interest in the hold notice effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the player in the general winning opening winning.

[Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment]
Next, a modification 1 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is connected to the first notice display effect and continues the hold notice effect each time the general winning opening notice display effect is performed. However, the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the eighth embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that the execution of the general winning opening notice display effect does not necessarily connect to the first notice display effect.

The general winning opening notice display effect executed by the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting mode of an indicator lamp and an example of a first notice display effect connection condition in the general winning opening notice display effect of the first modification of the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 performs a general winning opening notice display effect depending on the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L. The effect control device 300 can use the reception of the general winning opening A winning command, that is, the detection of winning in the general winning opening 351 as an opportunity to execute the general winning opening notice display effect. Since the general winning opening notice display effect constitutes a part of the hold notice effect, the detection of winning the general winning opening 351 can be regarded as one of the execution triggers of the hold notice effect.

The lighting modes of the indicator lamp 351L are from pattern P70 to pattern P74. The pattern P70 is the extinguishing of the indicator lamp 351L. The pattern P71 is white lighting of the indicator lamp 351L. The pattern P72 is the blue lighting of the indicator lamp 351L. The pattern P73 is a green lighting of the indicator lamp 351L. The pattern P74 is lit in red for a predetermined period (for example, 256 ms) of the indicator lamp 351L.

The gaming machine 10 fails to satisfy the connection condition to the first notice display effect when the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L is from the pattern P70 to the pattern P73, and when the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L is the pattern P74, the first notice display effect. The connection condition to is satisfied.

Then, the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 351L changes each time the winning is detected in the general winning opening 351. For example, when the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L is the pattern P70 before winning the general winning opening 351, the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L from the pattern P71 to the pattern P74 by detecting the winning of the general winning opening 351. Probabilistically change to one of. Similarly, when the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L is the pattern P71 before winning the general winning opening 351, the gaming machine 10 patterns the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L from the pattern P72 by detecting the winning of the general winning opening 351. Probabilistically change to any of P74. Further, when the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L is the pattern P72 before winning the general winning opening 351, the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L to the pattern P73 or the pattern P74 by detecting the winning of the general winning opening 351. Probabilistically change to one of. Further, when the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L is the pattern P73 before winning the general winning opening 351, the gaming machine 10 changes the lighting mode of the indicator light 351L to the pattern P74 by detecting the winning of the general winning opening 351. .. If the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 351L becomes the pattern P74 in the process of changing the lighting mode, the gaming machine 10 satisfies the connection condition to the first notice display effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs the general winning opening notice display effect once for the general winning opening 351 and also executes the general winning opening notice display effect one or more times to move to the first notice display effect. You can continue the hold notice effect by connecting to. That is, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the continuation frequency of the hold notice effect from becoming excessive depending on the winning detection frequency of the general winning opening 351. In such a gaming machine 10, a winning opening having a high winning detection frequency (for example, a general winning opening 352) or a gate having a high passing detection frequency (for example, a starting gate 34) is used as an opportunity to execute the first stage of the first notice display effect. Can be.

[Modification 2 of the eighth embodiment]
Next, a modification 2 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the eighth embodiment makes it possible to change the execution trigger of the hold notice effect for each winning trigger, timer trigger, and hold shift trigger according to the gaming state.

The adjustment of the execution frequency of the hold notice effect according to the game state of the second modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a hold notice display effect frequency adjustment table that defines the execution frequency of the hold notice effect of the second modification of the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the eighth embodiment can adjust the execution frequency of the hold notice display effect according to the hold notice display effect frequency adjustment table. The hold notice display effect frequency adjustment table is stored in, for example, the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300.

The hold notice display effect frequency adjustment table defines the execution trigger of the hold notice effect for each game state. In the gaming state A (for example, the normal gaming state) corresponding to the left-handed game, the gaming machine 10 executes the hold notice effect triggered by the winning of the general winning opening winning A, and sets the monitoring timer time up (time A). The hold notice effect is executed as an opportunity. The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to adjust the execution frequency of the hold notice effect triggered by the hold shift in connection with the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the winning of the general winning opening prize A. When the game machine 10 executes the hold notice effect triggered by the winning of the general winning opening prize A, the game machine 10 reduces the execution frequency of the hold notice effect triggered by the hold shift (frequency A1). Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the winning of the general winning opening prize A, the gaming machine 10 frequently executes the hold notice effect triggered by the hold shift (frequency B1 (> frequency A1). )) Return to.

Further, in the gaming state B corresponding to the right-handed game (for example, in the normal electric support state), the gaming machine 10 wins the general winning opening winning B (for example, the winning rate is different from that of the general winning opening winning A). The hold notice effect is executed as a trigger, and the hold notice effect is executed when the monitoring timer time is up (time B, but different from time A). The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to adjust the execution frequency of the hold notice effect triggered by the hold shift in connection with the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the winning of the general winning opening winning B. When the game machine 10 executes the hold notice effect triggered by the winning of the general winning opening winning B, the game machine 10 reduces the execution frequency of the hold notice effect of the hold shift trigger (frequency A2). Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the winning of the general winning opening winning B, the gaming machine 10 frequently executes the hold notice effect triggered by the hold shift (frequency B2 (> frequency A2). )) Return to.

The gaming machine 10 can appropriately adjust the execution frequency of the event trigger (winning trigger) and timer trigger hold notice effect and the hold shift trigger hold notice effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can appropriately adjust the execution frequency of the hold notice effect according to the gaming state.

[Modification 3 of the eighth embodiment]
Next, a modification 3 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment limits the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice, but the game machine 10 of the modification 3 of the eighth embodiment can limit the execution of the hold notice in multiple stages. It differs in that.

The adjustment of the execution frequency of the hold notice effect according to the game state of the third modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the relationship between the general winning opening A winning and the hold notice effect of the third modification of the eighth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 limits the simultaneous execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the detection of winning in the general winning opening A (general winning opening 351) in multiple stages. The gaming machine 10 restricts the connection from the second notice display effect to the third notice display effect in the hold notice effect restriction 1 (stage 1). Further, the gaming machine 10 restricts the simultaneous execution of the hold notice effect in the hold notice effect limit 2 (stage 2).

For example, it is assumed that the gaming machine 10 detects winning in the general winning opening A at timings t11, t13, and t15, respectively. Further, it is assumed that the gaming machine 10 enables the hold notice effect limit 1 at the timing t12 and enables the hold notice effect limit 2 at the timing t14.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 executes the hold notice effect (A5) at the timing t11 and executes the hold notice effect (A6) at the timing t13. However, even if the gaming machine 10 allows the hold notice effect (A5) to be connected from the second notice display effect to the third notice display effect, the hold notice effect (A6) is changed from the second notice display effect to the third notice. Do not allow connection to display effects. In this way, the gaming machine 10 limits the execution range of the hold notice effect by the hold notice effect limit 1. Such a gaming machine 10 can prevent the hold notice effect that is executed at the same time from becoming too complicated. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 can pay the player's attention to other effects being executed at the same time.

Further, the gaming machine 10 limits the execution of the new hold notice effect at the timing t15. In this way, the gaming machine 10 restricts the execution of the hold notice effect by the hold notice effect limit 2. Such a gaming machine 10 can prevent the hold notice effect that is executed at the same time from becoming too complicated. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 can pay the player's attention to other effects being executed at the same time.

The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores a start memory as an execution right of a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game), and starts in relation to the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It is possible to change the hold display mode of the memory and execute the hold notice effect. The game machine 10 includes a detection means (for example, a winning opening switch 35a) and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The detecting means can detect the winning of the game medium to a predetermined winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 351) in which the starting memory cannot be generated. The control means changes the hold display mode (for example, pattern P50 to pattern P57) of the start storage, triggered by the winning detection of the game medium by the detection means.

(2) The gaming machine 10 stores a start memory as an execution right of a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game), and starts in relation to the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It is possible to change the hold display mode of the memory and execute the hold notice effect. The game machine 10 includes a detection means (for example, a winning opening switch 35a) and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The detecting means can detect the winning of the game medium to a predetermined winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 351) in which the starting memory cannot be generated. The control means changes the hold display mode (for example, pattern P50 to pattern P57) of the start storage, triggered by the winning detection of the game medium by the detection means. In addition, the control means changes the hold display mode of the start memory when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses. Further, when the control means changes the hold display mode of the start memory triggered by the winning detection of the game medium by the detection means before the elapse of the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the control means initializes the time counting of the predetermined time. ..

(3) The gaming machine 10 stores the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game (for example, the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game), and starts in relation to the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It is possible to change the hold display mode of the memory and execute the hold notice effect. The game machine 10 includes a detection means (for example, a winning opening switch 35a) and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The detecting means can detect the winning of the game medium to a predetermined winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 351) in which the starting memory cannot be generated. The control means changes the hold display mode (for example, pattern P50 to pattern P57) of the start storage, triggered by the winning detection of the game medium by the detection means. In addition, the control means changes the hold display mode of the start memory when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses. Further, when the control means changes the hold display mode of the start memory triggered by the winning detection of the game medium by the detection means before the elapse of the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the elapse of the predetermined time is triggered. Restrict changes to the hold display mode of the start memory.

(4) The control means of (1) changes the hold display mode of the start memory, triggered by the detection of two or more prizes in the game medium by the detection means.
(5) In the gaming machine 10 of (1), the control means can limit the number of simultaneous executions of the hold notice effect (for example, three simultaneous executions).

(6) In the gaming machine 10 of (1), the control means can limit the execution range of the hold notice display effect (for example, connection from the second notice display effect to the third notice display effect).
[9th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment controls the effect unit in charge of the game effect to stabilize the voltage and operation when the power is turned on. First, the effect unit of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of the effect unit in the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 includes light emitting units L00 to L0B on the front frame 12. The light emitting units L00 to L0B are arranged in an arc shape on the front frame 12 so as to surround the game board 30. The light emitting units L00 to L0B are one of the decoration units in charge of the decoration of the gaming machine 10, and one of the production units in charge of the game production of the gaming machine 10.

The light emitting units L00 to L0B are provided on the front frame 12. Specifically, the light emitting units L00 to L05 are provided in the frame decoration device 18 on the left side of the glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15, and the light emitting units L06 to L0B are provided in the frame decoration device 18 on the right side of the front frame 12. .. The light emitting units L00 to L05 form one decorative unit (light emitting group K1) as the frame decoration device 18 on the left side of the front frame 12, and the light emitting units L06 to L0B form 1 as the frame decoration device 18 on the right side of the front frame 12. It constitutes one decorative unit (light emitting group K2).

The light emitting units L00 to L0B can emit light by sequentially switching a plurality of light emitting colors, and are full-color LEDs. For example, the light emitting unit L00 is configured to include three monochromatic LEDs of a red LED (L00R), a green LED (L00G), and a blue LED (L00B). Although not shown, the light emitting units L01 to L0B also include three monochromatic LEDs like the light emitting unit L00.

The light emitting units L00 to L0B may include a lamp for notification (for example, for notification of payout abnormality) arranged at a predetermined portion. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L0B are components of the front frame (main body frame) 12 that can correspond to the game boards 30 of different game models. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 controls the light emitting units L00 to L0B in a common light emitting mode that does not depend on the game model, and realizes a common notification mode in different game models by using the light emitting units L00 to L0B.

The gaming machine 10 includes light emitting units L10 to L17 on the gaming board 30. The light emitting units L10 to L17 are arranged in an arc on the game board 30 so as to surround the display device 41a. The light emitting units L10 to L17 are one of the decoration units in charge of the decoration of the gaming machine 10, and one of the production units in charge of the game production of the gaming machine 10.

The light emitting units L10 to L17 are provided on one or more of the game board constituent members such as the center case 40, the board effect device 44, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. The light emitting units L10 to L17 can sequentially switch a plurality of light emitting colors to emit light, and are, for example, full-color LEDs. Although not shown, the light emitting units L10 to L17 are also configured to include three monochromatic LEDs like the light emitting units L00.

The light emitting units L10 to L17 are components of the game board 30 depending on the game model. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 controls the light emitting units L10 to L17 in a light emitting mode peculiar to the gaming model, and realizes a notification mode peculiar to the gaming model by using the light emitting units L10 to L17.

The gaming machine 10 includes light emitting units L20 and L21 on the gaming board 30. The light emitting units L20 and L21 are arranged near the lower right portion of the display device 41a. The light emitting units L20 and L21 function as a fluctuation state notification symbol (fourth symbol) for notifying the fluctuation state of the decorative symbol. For example, the light emitting unit L20 blinks in the fluctuating state of the special figure A, lights up when the fluctuation is stopped, and turns off in the fluctuating state of the special figure B. Further, the light emitting unit L21 blinks in the fluctuating state of the special figure B, lights up when the fluctuation is stopped, and turns off in the fluctuating state of the special figure A. The light emitting units L20 and L21 are also one of the decoration units in charge of the decoration of the gaming machine 10 and one of the production units in charge of the game production of the gaming machine 10 on one side. The light emitting units L20 and L21 form one decorative unit (light emitting group K4) as a decorative device of the game board 30.

The gaming machine 10 includes an option setting unit 25 located on the upper plate 21, and the option setting unit 25 also includes a plurality of light emitting units. These plurality of light emitting units are arranged in an arc shape on the option setting unit 25. These plurality of light emitting units are one of the decoration units in charge of decorating the game machine 10, and one of the production units in charge of the game production of the game machine 10. These plurality of light emitting units constitute one decorative unit (light emitting group K3) as a decorative device of the option setting unit 25. The light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 will be described later with reference to FIG. 145.

The gaming machine 10 includes two display devices 41a and 41b on the gaming board 30. The display device 41a is an LCD arranged in the central portion of the game board 30 and is a main display device. The display device 41a is one of the decoration units in charge of decorating the game machine 10, and is also one of the production units in charge of the game production of the game machine 10. The display device 41a constitutes one decorative unit as a decorative device of the game board 30. When the display device 41a includes the LCD and the backlight (light emitting unit), each of the LCD and the backlight is one of the decoration units in charge of the decoration of the gaming machine 10 on one side, and the gaming machine. It is one of the production departments in charge of 10 game productions. Further, when the backlight is composed of a plurality of white LEDs, the backlight constitutes one decoration unit (light emitting group K5) as a decoration device.

The display device 41b is an LCD arranged on the peripheral edge of the display device 41a, and is a secondary display device having a smaller display area than the display device 41a. For example, the display device 41b is arranged so as to partially overlap the front surface of the display device 41a. The display device 41b is one of the decoration units in charge of decorating the game machine 10, and is also one of the production units in charge of the game production of the game machine 10. The display device 41b constitutes one decorative unit as a decorative device of the game board 30. When the display device 41b includes an LCD and a backlight (light emitting unit), each of the LCD and the backlight is one of the decoration units in charge of decorating the gaming machine 10 on one side, and the gaming machine. It is one of the production departments in charge of 10 game productions. Further, when the backlight is composed of a plurality of white LEDs, the backlight constitutes one decoration unit (light emitting group K6) as a decoration device.

The game machine 10 includes two board effect devices 44a and 44b on the game board 30. The board effect device 44a is a movable portion located on the left side of the display device 41a. For example, the board effect device 44a can be switched between a state in which the front side of the display device 41a is not shielded and a state in which the front side is shielded. The board effect device 44a is one of the effect units in charge of the game effect of the gaming machine 10.

The board effect device 44b is a movable portion located on the right side of the display device 41a. For example, the board effect device 44b can be switched between a state in which the front side of the display device 41a is not shielded and a state in which the front side is shielded. The board production device 44b is one of the production units in charge of the game production of the game machine 10.

The gaming machine 10 includes three speakers (sound output units) 19a1, 19a2, 19b on the front frame 12. The speaker 19a1 is located at the upper left portion of the front frame 12. The speaker 19a1 is one of the production units in charge of the game production of the game machine 10. The speaker 19a2 is located at the upper right portion of the front frame 12. The speaker 19a2 is one of the production units in charge of the game production of the game machine 10. The speaker 19b is located at the lower right of the front frame 12. The speaker 19b is one of the production units in charge of the game production of the game machine 10.

The gaming machine 10 includes a left gaming area in which the game ball can flow down on the left side of the display device 41 and a right gaming area in which the game ball can flow down on the right side of the display device 41. Form. The gaming machine 10 includes a normal variable winning device 37 that can be expected to have a larger winning opportunity when the gaming ball flows down the left gaming area, and a special variable winning device 37 that can expect a larger winning opportunity when the gaming ball flows down the right gaming area. Has 38. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 may require the player to strike a left-handed ball that hits the game ball into the left-handed game area and a right-handed player that hits the game ball into the right-handed game area according to the gaming state. The light emitting group K1 to the light emitting group K3 are arranged in an arc shape when viewed from the front side, so that the light emitting group K1 and the light emitting group K3 can be separated and guided according to the light emitting mode.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform a separate operation by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation unit 24. In the light emitting group K1 to the light emitting group K3, by arranging the light emitting units in an arc shape corresponding to the rotation direction of the operation unit 24, the player's perceived effect on the striking guidance is improved. The arcuate arrangement of the light emitting part shall include an annular arrangement or a spiral arrangement of the light emitting part.

The option setting unit 25 is an example of an operation reception unit that accepts player operations, and the operation reception unit having a third arc-shaped light emitting group is not limited to the option setting unit 25, but is an operation unit 24 and the like. May be good.

Next, the light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of a light emitting unit in the option setting unit of the ninth embodiment.
The option setting unit 25 includes push button LEDs 250 to 258, touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8, and push button SW. The push button LEDs 250 to 258 are full-color LEDs, respectively. The touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8 can detect the player's touch operation. The push button SW can detect the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25.

Here, the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signals of the touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8 and the detection signals of the push button SW. For example, the state in which the touch sensor TSW1 or the touch sensor TSW6 detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 becomes the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. Equivalent to. Further, the state in which the touch sensor TSW4 detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, in the ninth embodiment, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button).

The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface that becomes the upper surface when the player looks down is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circles about the size of a fingertip on its upper surface, and a push button LED is arranged on each small circle. In the push button 25, the push button LED 250 is arranged in a small circle located in the center of the upper surface, and the push button LEDs 251 to 258 are placed in eight small circles located on the circumference surrounding the small circle located in the center. To place.

Since the small circle portion on which the push button LED 258 is arranged does not arrange the touch sensor, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8. The small circle on which the push button LED 258 is arranged is located on the front left side when viewed from the player side when the push button 25 is in the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side. It is easy to treat the small circle part 258 as a home position.

Further, since the small circle portion on which the push button LED 258 is arranged does not arrange the touch sensor, it has a star-shaped polygonal design in order to easily distinguish it from the small circle portion on which the touch sensor is arranged.

These effect units operate by the electric power supplied by the power supply device 400. Next, the voltage waveform at the time of turning on the power, in which the power supplied by the power supply device 400 tends to be unstable, will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of voltage waveforms of various voltages generated by the power supply device when the power is turned on according to the ninth embodiment.

When AC24V is turned on as the power source for the gaming machine 10, the power supply device 400 first starts supplying the guaranteed voltage of DC32V (guaranteed DC32V). Next, the power supply device 400 includes a DC5V used as a logic power source for a game microcomputer and various ICs required for game control, a ball detection switch (for example, a start port 1 switch 36a and a start port 2 switch 37a), and the like. The supply of DC12V used for the production device and DC15V used for the effect device (including the decoration device) will be started.

The power supply unit 400 monitors the generated 32V voltage after the elapse of the predetermined delay time Ta, and changes the power failure monitoring signal (for example, when the state above the threshold value (for example, 17V) is maintained for the monitoring time Tb). From low level to high level). Further, the power supply device 400 outputs a reset signal (for example, from low level to high level) at the timing t1 after a predetermined time (for example, time Tc) from the detection of the occurrence of a power failure. The power supply device 400 outputs a reset signal after a lapse of a predetermined time even when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered.

Next, a specific circuit configuration in the power supply device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a specific circuit configuration in the power supply device of the ninth embodiment.
Among the circuits shown, the circuits other than the DC12V generation circuit 411, the DC5V & DC5VBB generation circuit 412, and the DC15V generation circuit 413 are power supply monitoring control circuits, and correspond to the control signal generation unit 430 (see FIG. 3) in the power supply device 400. The DC12V generation circuit 411, the DC5V & DC5VBB generation circuit 412, and the DC15V generation circuit 413 correspond to the normal power supply unit 410 (see FIG. 3) in the power supply device 400.

Further, a guaranteed DC32V is generated by a diode bridge circuit DB1 that full-wave rectifies the AC input of AC24V and a smoothing capacitor C2, and the DC12V generation circuit 411, the DC5V & DC5VBB generation circuit 412, and the DC15V generation circuit 413 convert this guaranteed DC32V into a DC-DC. By converting, DC voltages of DC12V, DC5V, and DC15V are generated. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the DC12V generation circuit 411 and the DC5V & DC5VBB generation circuit 412 are composed of a series regulator, and the DC15V generation circuit 413 is composed of a switching regulator. The diode bridge circuit DB1 and the smoothing capacitor C2 can be regarded as a power supply unit that generates a guaranteed DC32V.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a current limiting element that suppresses the inrush current that flows into the smoothing capacitor C2 when the AC24V is turned on, between the diode bridge circuit DB1 that functions as the power supply unit that generates the guaranteed DC32V and the smoothing capacitor C2. NTC thermistor (Negative Temperature Coefficient Thermistor) Z1 is provided. The NTC thermistor is an element whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and functions as a high resistance element because the temperature is lowered before the power is turned on, and the inrush current at the time of turning on the power can be suppressed.

The power supply monitoring control circuit includes a 15V power supply on / off control circuit 431 that monitors the AC input and controls the DC15V generation circuit 413 on / off, and a power failure detection circuit that monitors the guaranteed DC32V and generates a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal. It also includes a power supply start-up delay circuit 433 that monitors the guaranteed DC32V and gives a predetermined delay (Ta) at the time of power supply start-up.

The 15V power on / off control circuit 431 includes a voltage dividing circuit consisting of rectifying transistors D1 and D2 connected to the diode bridge circuit DB1 and also forming a full-wave rectifying circuit, a Zener diode ZD1 and resistors R1 and R2. The voltage divided by the voltage circuit is turned on / off by the output of the transistor Q1 applied to the base terminal, the resistor R3 and the capacitor C1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor Q1, the OR gate GATE1 and the OR gate GATE1. It is provided with an emitter follower type output stage including a transistor Q3, and is configured to output a signal ON / OFF for controlling ON / OFF of the DC15V generation circuit 413 from the output stage. In the 15V power on / off control circuit 431, after the power is turned on, the AC input full-wave rectified waveform is shaped by the Zener diode ZD1, the transistor Q1 is controlled by the waveform shaped by the Zener diode ZD1, and the AC input sine wave signal. Is detected.

The power supply start-up delay circuit 433 includes a voltage dividing circuit composed of a Zener diode ZD2 and resistors R4 and R5 connected in series between the guaranteed DC32V power supply line and the grounding point, and a voltage divided by the voltage dividing circuit. Is provided with a transistor Q2 applied to the base terminal, a resistor R6 and a capacitor C4 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor Q2, and the transistor Q2 is turned on when the guaranteed DC32V reaches a predetermined potential (for example, 11V) at power-on. By detecting the rise, the output does not change immediately even if the transistor Q2 is turned on because the capacitor C4 is connected to the output node N2, which is the connection node between the resistor R6 and the transistor Q2, and the output is delayed by a predetermined time. The output will change to a low level. Then, the voltage of the output node N2 is applied to the other input terminal of the OR gate GATE 1 constituting the 15V power on / off control circuit 431.

As a result, the DC15V generation circuit 413 can be turned on after a predetermined delay time when the power is started, while the DC15V generation circuit 413 can be turned off immediately when the power is turned off.

Specifically, the output DC5V of the DC5V & DC5VBB generation circuit 412 starts the output from the guaranteed DC32V, for example, about 7V, so that the output establishment of the OR gate GATE1 is almost simultaneous with the inversion of the transistor Q2. Therefore, when both the transistors Q1 and Q2 are turned on, the output of the OR gate GATE1 changes to a low level after a predetermined delay time, the signal ON / OFF output from the output stage changes to a high level, and the DC15V generation circuit 413 Is turned on to start the operation. On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the drive current from the Zener diode ZD1 applied to the transistor Q1 is cut off, so that the transistor Q1 is turned off and the input voltage of one of the OR gate GATE1 rises to increase the OR gate GATE1. The output changes to a high level, the signal ON / OFF output from the output stage changes to a low level, and the DC15V generation circuit 413 is turned off to stop the operation.

In such a power supply circuit 400, as described above, since the NTC thermistor functions as a high resistance element in a low temperature state before the power is turned on, the inrush current at the time of turning on the power can be suppressed, while being high. In the load state, the output voltage may become unstable and a reset signal may be issued. Since the high load state is largely due to the load of the effect unit (increased power consumption), the gaming machine 10 suppresses the load of the effect unit when the power is turned on, which may be in a low temperature state.

Next, the load limitation of the effect unit performed by the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the power consumption limiting process at power-on according to the ninth embodiment. The power consumption limiting process when the power is turned on is a process for limiting the load of the effect unit when the power is turned on. The power consumption limiting process at power-on is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The power consumption limiting process at power-on can be executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 101) of the main process, for example. The power consumption limiting process at power-on is a process that is executed only once after the power is turned on.

[Step D141] The control unit acquires the power consumption limiting condition. The power consumption limit condition defines the conditions for releasing the power consumption limit of the effect unit and also defines the power consumption limit strength of the effect unit. The power consumption limiting condition will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

[Step D142] The control unit determines whether or not the power-on is a power-on recovery, that is, whether the power-on is a power-on due to power failure recovery or a power-on accompanied by a reset. The power-on by power-on after power failure is a power-on that retains the control information before the power failure (power cutoff) in the non-volatile memory and can return to the control state before the power failure. It is a power-on that cannot return to the control state before the power failure by clearing the control information held in. The control unit proceeds to step D143 when the power is turned on to recover from a power failure, and proceeds to step D144 when the power is not restored from a power failure.

The game control device 100 transmits a "command at the time of RAM initialization" to the effect control device 300 in step S30 of the main process (see FIGS. 6 and 7), and sends a "command at the time of power failure recovery" in step S25. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The "command at the time of RAM initialization" indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the time of RAM initialization. The "command at the time of power failure recovery" indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the time of power failure recovery. Therefore, when the control unit receives the "command at the time of RAM initialization" from the game control device 100, it can determine that the power-on is a power-on accompanied by a reset. Further, when the control unit receives the "command at the time of power failure recovery" from the game control device 100, the control unit can determine that the power is turned on by the power failure recovery.

[Step D143] The control unit sets the power consumption limiting condition at the time of power failure recovery. Specifically, the control unit sets the restriction release condition and also sets the effect mode of the effect unit according to the limit strength.

[Step D144] The control unit sets the power consumption limiting condition at the time of reset. Specifically, the control unit sets the restriction release condition and also sets the effect mode of the effect unit according to the limit strength.

[Step D145] While setting the power consumption limit, the control unit limits (prohibits) the setting change operation related to the power consumption of the gaming machine 10. For example, the gaming machine 10 accepts a player operation by the push button 25, and makes it possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting unit and the volume of the sound output unit. However, if the game machine 10 gives priority to the setting change operation by the player operation while the power consumption limit is set, the reset signal becomes unstable and the stability of the game control may be impaired. After limiting the setting change operation, the control unit ends the power consumption limiting process when the power is turned on. The control unit can release the restriction on the setting change operation after the power consumption restriction is released.

Next, the power consumption limiting condition will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of the power consumption limiting condition of the ninth embodiment. The power consumption limiting condition A shown in (1) defines a limiting release condition and a limiting strength for each power-on state. The power consumption limiting condition A is stored in, for example, the PROM 321.

According to the power consumption limit condition A, the restriction release condition of the power-on state "power failure recovery" is a timer time-up of 60 seconds, and the limit strength of the power-on state "power failure recovery" is "weak". Further, the restriction release condition of the power-on state "reset" is a timer time-up of 60 seconds, and the restriction strength of the power-on state "reset" is "strong".

The limiting strength "strong" fulfills a stronger limitation than the limiting strength "weak", and it is necessary to further reduce the power consumption. The control unit limits the effect mode in the effect unit according to the limiting strength.

That is, according to the power consumption limiting condition A, the effect control device 300 limits the effect mode in the effect unit according to the limiting strength from the start of the effect control device 300 until 60 seconds elapse. Then, the effect control device 300 fulfills a stronger restriction on the power-on state "reset" than on the power-on state "power failure recovery". This difference in limiting strength is due to the importance placed on the stability of game control after the power is turned on in the power-on state "reset" rather than the power-on state "power failure recovery".

For example, such a difference in limiting strength is due to the fact that the temperature of the NTC thermistor is considered to be lower in the power-on state "reset" than in the power-on state "power failure recovery".
When the stability of the game control after the power is turned on is more important than the power-on state "reset" in the power-on state "power failure recovery", the effect control device 300 is powered on rather than the power-on state "reset". A stronger restriction may be fulfilled for the state "power outage recovery".

For example, such a difference in limiting strength is due to the fact that it is more likely that the player is playing in the power-on state "power failure recovery" than in the power-on state "reset".
In addition, the power-on state "reset" is highly likely to be power-on in the presence of the game hall staff, and the power-on state "power failure recovery" is likely to be power-on in the absence of the game hall staff. high. This difference in limiting strength is due to the importance placed on the stability of game control with respect to power-on in the absence of a game hall staff member.

Next, the power consumption limiting condition B different from the power consumption limiting condition A is shown in (2). The power consumption limit condition B defines a limit release condition and a limit strength for each power-on state. The power consumption limiting condition B is stored in, for example, the PROM 321.

According to the power consumption limit condition B, the restriction release condition of the power-on state "power failure recovery" is a timer time-up of 50 seconds, and the limit strength of the power-on state "power failure recovery" is "weak". Further, the restriction release condition of the power-on state "reset" is a timer time-up of 60 seconds, and the restriction strength of the power-on state "reset" is "weak".

That is, according to the power consumption limiting condition B, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the limit strength from the start of the effect control device 300 to the elapse of 50 to 60 seconds depending on the power-on state. Limit the mode of production in. Then, the effect control device 300 fulfills a longer period limitation on the power-on state "reset" than on the power-on state "power failure recovery". This difference in the time limit is due to the fact that there is a risk of a low temperature state in the power-on state "reset" rather than in the power-on state "power failure recovery".

The restriction period is not a fixed value but may be a variable value that changes according to the surrounding environment. For example, the effect control device 300 can set the timer time-up period with reference to the output value of the RTC 338. More specifically, the effect control device 300 calculates the power-on interval from the previous power-off time and the current power-on time with reference to the output value of RTC338, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value, the time-up period. Is shortened (including "0").

Next, the power consumption limiting condition C different from the power consumption limiting conditions A and B is shown in (3). The power consumption limit condition C defines a limit release condition and a limit strength for each power-on state and game state. The power consumption limiting condition C is stored in, for example, the PROM 321.

According to the power consumption limit condition C, the power-on state "power failure recovery" and the restriction release condition of the game state A (for example, the customer waiting state or the normal game state) are the timer time-up of 60 seconds, and the power-on state " The limit strength of "power failure recovery" is "weak". On the other hand, the restriction release condition of the power-on state "power failure recovery" and the game state B (for example, the hit game state or the general power support state) is the timer time-up of 60 seconds, and the limit strength of the power-on state "power failure recovery". Is "strong".

Further, the restriction release condition of the power-on state "reset" and the game state A is a timer time-up of 60 seconds, and the restriction strength of the power-on state "reset" is "weak". On the other hand, the restriction release condition of the power-on state "reset" and the game state B is the timer time-up of 60 seconds, and the restriction strength of the power-on state "reset" is "strong".

For example, there is a possibility that the normal electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b operate in the hit game state and the general electric support state. The effect control device 300 strongly restricts the operation of the effect unit that does not affect the result of the game in order to secure the operation of the actuators such as the normal electric solenoid 37c and the winning opening solenoid 38b that affect the result of the game.

Although the timer time-up is mentioned as an example of the restriction release condition, the restriction release condition may be limited to the end of the required effect, the transition to the predetermined gaming state, and the like. Further, the limiting strength is set to two levels of "weak" and "strong", but may be set to three or more levels. In addition, the limiting strength may not be set in multiple stages, and only the presence or absence of limiting may be specified. Further, although the gaming machine 10 is said to satisfy the power consumption limit for both the power-on state "power failure recovery" and the power-on state "reset", the game machine 10 may satisfy the power consumption limit for only one of them. For example, the gaming machine 10 may not satisfy the power consumption limit for the power-on state “reset” and not for the power-on state “power failure recovery”. Further, the gaming machine 10 may be one that fulfills the power consumption limit for the power-on state "power failure recovery" and does not satisfy the power consumption limit for the power-on state "reset".

Next, the effect mode for each limiting intensity in the sound output unit will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode for each limiting intensity in the sound output unit of the ninth embodiment.

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (1), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the sound output unit by changing the volume. In the gaming machine 10, the volume level is set to 5 in the non-restricted mode, but the volume level 3 is set to suppress the volume more than the volume level 5 in the limited intensity "weak" (weak restricted mode), and the limited intensity is "strong" (strong). In the restricted mode), the volume level 1 is set to suppress the volume more than the volume level 3. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 can control the amplifier circuit 337 to adjust the volume.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (2) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1). The gaming machine 10 can apply the restrictions shown in (2) to the effects mode in place of the restrictions on the effect mode shown in (1) or in addition to the restrictions on the effect mode shown in (1).

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the sound output unit by changing the sound data. In the non-restricted mode, the game machine 10 outputs sound using sound data (standard data) having a high volume level as a whole, but in the weakly restricted mode, the restricted data A in which the volume level is suppressed more than the standard data is output. In the strongly restricted mode, the limited data B whose volume level is suppressed more than the restricted data A is used to output the sound. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 can store the standard data, the limited data A, and the limited data B in the audio ROM 327, and can instruct the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the standard data, the limited data A, and the limited data B.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (3) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1) and (2). The gaming machine 10 produces the restrictions shown in (3) in place of the restrictions on the effect modes shown in (1) and (2), or in addition to the restrictions on the effect modes shown in (1) and (2). It can be applied to aspects.

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (3), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the sound output unit by limiting the sound output channel. The game machine 10 outputs sound using all sound output channels (sound output CH0, CH1, CH2) in the non-restricted mode, but limits the sound output from the sound output CH2 in the weakly restricted mode to output sound. Sound is output from CH0 and CH1, and in the strongly restricted mode, the sound output from the sound output CH1 and CH2 is restricted and the sound is output from the sound output CH0. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 can instruct the sound source LSI 314 to output a sound output channel. The gaming machine 10 may assign a sound that guarantees fair gaming (for example, an error notification sound (alarm sound)) as a sound output channel that does not limit the sound output CH0. In addition, the gaming machine 10 emits a sound that may be disadvantageous to the player by not outputting the sound (for example, a notification sound for forgetting to remove the card or a notification sound for providing game guidance such as "Aim to the right!"). May be assigned.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (4) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1) to (3). The gaming machine 10 can apply the restrictions shown in (4) to the effects mode instead of the restrictions shown in the effects modes (1) to (3).

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (4), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the sound output unit by changing the sound data for each sound output channel. In the non-restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 outputs the standard data S0 at the sound output CH0, outputs the standard data S1 at the sound output CH1, and outputs the standard data S2 at the sound output CH2. In the weak restriction mode, the gaming machine 10 outputs the restriction data A0 at the sound output CH0, outputs the restriction data A1 at the sound output CH1, and outputs the restriction data A2 at the sound output CH2. In the strong restriction mode, the gaming machine 10 outputs the restriction data B0 at the sound output CH0, outputs the restriction data B1 at the sound output CH1, and outputs the restriction data B2 at the sound output CH2.

The power consumption of the sound output unit is maximum in the non-restricted mode, and decreases in the order of the weakly restricted mode and the strongly restricted mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can limit the power consumption of the sound output unit while flexibly limiting the mode of production, and can stably continue the gaming control after the power is turned on.

As an example of the limitation of the flexible production mode, for example, since the game machine 10 can set the sound data for each limiting intensity and for each sound output channel, when the error notification is performed by the sound output CH0, the interval period of the alarm sound ( The average power consumption can be different by differentiating the silent period). Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress power consumption after the power is turned on while reliably performing error notification.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (5) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1) to (4). The gaming machine 10 produces the restrictions shown in (5) in place of the restrictions on the effect modes shown in (1) to (4), or in addition to the restrictions on the effect modes shown in (1) to (4). It can be applied to aspects.

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (5), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the sound output unit by limiting the speakers that output sound. In the non-restricted mode, the game machine 10 outputs sound using all the speakers (speakers 19a1, 19a2, 19b), but in the weakly restricted mode, the sound output from the speaker 19b is limited and the sound is output from the speakers 19a1, 19a2. In the strong restriction mode, the sound output from the speakers 19a2 and 19b is limited and the sound is output from the sound output speaker 19a1. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the sound output unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 can control the amplifier circuit 337 to limit the speakers that output sound. The gaming machine 10 may limit the sound output in the order of the speakers 19b, 19a2, 19a1 when the power consumption increases in the order of the speakers 19a1, 19a2, 19b.

In any of the restricted modes, the effect control device 300 can check the operation of each speaker when the power is turned on by outputting sound for each speaker. For example, the gaming machine 10 can check the operation of each speaker when the power is turned on by changing the sound data for each restricted mode.

The game machine 10 can limit the sound output for each speaker, each sound output channel, and each sound output timing in the sound output unit by not performing sound output (for example, mute, sound output OFF). , It can also be limited by suppressing the sound output (for example, volume reduction, maximum volume limit, etc.).

Next, the operation of each speaker when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of sound output timing for each restriction mode in the speaker when the power is turned on according to the ninth embodiment.

In the non-restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the upper left speaker (speaker 19a1), the upper right speaker (speaker 19a2), and the lower speaker (speaker 19b) at the timing t0 when the initialization process after the power is turned on is completed.

The gaming machine 10 has a weak restriction mode or a strong restriction mode from the timing t0 when the initialization process after the power is turned on to the timing t6 when the NTC thermistor stabilizes. In the weakly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the upper left speaker and the lower speaker at timing t0, and limits the sound output from the upper right speaker. The gaming machine 10 limits the sound output from the upper left speaker at timing t1, and then outputs sound from the upper right speaker at timing t2. The gaming machine 10 continues to limit the sound output from the upper right speaker at the timing t3 until the timing t6, and then outputs the sound from the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, and the lower speaker at the timing t6. As described above, the gaming machine 10 limits the number of speakers that simultaneously output sound between timing t0 and timing t6 to a maximum of two in the weakly restricted mode.

In the strong restriction mode, the gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the upper left speaker at timing t0, and limits the sound output from the upper right speaker and the lower speaker. The gaming machine 10 limits the sound output from the upper left speaker at timing t1, and then outputs sound from the upper right speaker at timing t2. The gaming machine 10 limits the sound output from the upper right speaker at the timing t3, and then outputs the sound from the lower speaker at the timing t4. The gaming machine 10 limits the sound output from the lower speaker at the timing t5, and then outputs the sound from the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, and the lower speaker at the timing t6. As described above, the gaming machine 10 limits the number of speakers that simultaneously output sound between timing t0 and timing t6 to a maximum of one in the strong restriction mode. The gaming machine 10 can confirm the operation of each speaker by sequentially outputting sound from each speaker in the strongly restricted mode.

In addition, the game machine 10 includes silent data in the sound data output from each speaker instead of limiting the sound output from each speaker or in addition to limiting the sound output from each speaker. You may limit the number of speakers that output sound at the same time.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 needs to be provided with a predetermined limiting period (for example, between timings t1 and t2) in order to more reliably suppress power consumption when switching the limitation of sound output from each speaker. If not, the period may be set to "0".

Next, the operation of each sound output channel when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of sound output timing for each restriction mode in the sound output channel when the power is turned on according to the ninth embodiment.

In the non-restricted mode, the game machine 10 has a sound output channel 0 (sound output CH0), a sound output channel 1 (sound output CH1), and a sound output channel 2 (sound output CH1) at the timing t10 when the initialization process after the power is turned on is completed. Sound is output from output CH2).

The gaming machine 10 has a restriction mode A or a restriction mode B from the timing t10 when the initialization process after the power is turned on to the timing t15 when the NTC thermistor stabilizes. Restriction mode A or restriction mode B is one of the restriction modes, and is a restriction mode that can be either a weak restriction mode or a strong restriction mode by relative comparison with other restriction modes.

In the limiting mode A, the gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the sound output CH0 at the timing t10, and limits the sound output from the sound output CH1 and the sound output CH2. The gaming machine 10 limits the sound output from the sound output CH0 at the timing t11, and then outputs the sound from the sound output CH1 at the timing t12. The gaming machine 10 limits the sound output from the sound output CH1 at the timing t13, and then outputs the sound from the sound output CH0 at the timing t14. After that, the gaming machine 10 repeats the sound output patterns of the sound output CH0 and the sound output CH1 from the timing t10 to the timing t14 until the timing t15. That is, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the simultaneous sound output of the sound output CH0 and the sound output CH1 from the timing t10 when the initialization process after the power is turned on to the timing t15 when the NTC thermistor stabilizes.

For example, the game machine 10 assigns a melody to the sound output CH0, assigns a rhythm to the sound output CH1, and divides the roles of the sound output CH0 and the sound output CH1, while performing sound output (for example, RAM clearing and power failure recovery). By outputting the notification sound to be notified), it is possible to reduce the power consumption after the power is turned on. Further, when the error sound is composed of two sounds (for example, "pee" and "po"), the game machine 10 assigns one to the sound output CH0 and assigns the other to the sound output CH1 to obtain the sound output CH0. It is possible to reduce the power consumption after the power is turned on while sharing the roles of the sound output CH1.

The gaming machine 10 limits the number of sound output channels that simultaneously output sound by limiting the sound output from the sound output CH2 to a maximum of one, but when limiting the number to two. The restriction on the sound output from the sound output CH2 may be released from the timing t10.

In the limiting mode B, the gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the sound output CH0 at the timing t10, and limits the sound output from the sound output CH1 and the sound output CH2. The gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the sound output CH1 at the timing t12. The gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the sound output CH2 at the timing t15. That is, the gaming machine 10 releases the restriction on the sound output CH0, the sound output CH1, the sound output CH2, and the simultaneous sound output in order from the timing t10 when the initialization process after the power is turned on to the timing t15 when the NTC thermistor stabilizes. do. Such sequential release of the limitation is due to the temperature of the NTC thermistor rising and the permissible power consumption value rising over time.

For example, the game machine 10 assigns an error sound to the sound output CH0, assigns a sound effect to the sound output CH1, assigns a BGM sound to the sound output CH2, and so on, and divides the roles of the sound output CH0 and the sound output CH1. It is possible to reduce the power consumption after the power is turned on.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with a predetermined limit period (for example, between timings t11 and t12) in order to more reliably suppress power consumption when switching the limit of sound output from each sound output channel. If it is not necessary, the period may be set to "0".

Next, the effect mode for each restricted mode in the light emitting unit will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode for each limiting intensity in the light emitting unit of the ninth embodiment.

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (1), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the light emitting unit by changing the amount of light. In the gaming machine 10, the brightness level is set to 5 in the non-restricted mode, but the brightness level 3 is set to suppress the amount of light more than the brightness level 5 in the limited intensity "weak" (weak limited mode), and the limited intensity is "strong" (strong). In the restricted mode), the brightness level 1 is set so that the amount of light is suppressed more than the brightness level 3. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the light emitting unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the light emitting unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 can control the panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and the frame decoration LED control circuit 333 to adjust the amount of light.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (2) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1). The gaming machine 10 can apply the restrictions shown in (2) to the effects mode in place of the restrictions on the effect mode shown in (1) or in addition to the restrictions on the effect mode shown in (1).

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the light emitting unit by changing the light emission data. In the non-restricted mode, the game machine 10 emits light using light emission data (standard data) having a large light emission amount (power consumption) as a whole, but in the weakly restricted mode, the light emission amount is suppressed as compared with the standard data. The limited data A is used to emit light, and in the strongly restricted mode, the limited data B in which the amount of light emitted is suppressed more than the restricted data A is used to emit light. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the light emitting unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the light emitting unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 stores the standard data, the limit data A, and the limit data B in the PROM 321 and emits light based on the standard data, the limit data A, and the limit data B in the panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and the frame decoration LED. It can be instructed to the control circuit 333.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (3) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1) and (2). The gaming machine 10 produces the restrictions shown in (3) in place of the restrictions on the effect modes shown in (1) and (2), or in addition to the restrictions on the effect modes shown in (1) and (2). It can be applied to aspects.

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (3), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the light emitting unit by changing (restricting) the emission color of the full-color LED. In the non-restricted mode, the game machine 10 allows all simultaneous light emission of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED to enable full-color light emission, but in the weakly restricted mode, among the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED. Simultaneous light emission is limited to two colors, and in the strong restriction mode, simultaneous light emission is limited to one color among red LED, green LED, and blue LED. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the light emitting unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the light emitting unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 can limit the light emission by masking the outputs of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (4) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1) to (3). The gaming machine 10 can apply the restrictions shown in (4) to the effects mode instead of the restrictions shown in the effects modes (1) to (3).

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (4), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the light emitting unit by limiting the light emission for each light emitting group (light emitting group K1, K2, K3, K4). The gaming machine 10 does not limit the light emission of all the light emitting groups in the non-restricted mode. In the weakly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the light emitting groups K1 and K2, and does not limit the light emission of the light emitting groups K3 and K4. In the strongly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the light emitting groups K1, K2, and K3, and does not limit the light emission of the light emitting group K4.

The power consumption of the light emitting unit is maximum in the non-restricted mode, and decreases in the order of the weakly restricted mode and the strongly restricted mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can limit the power consumption of the light emitting unit while flexibly limiting the mode of production, and can stably continue the gaming control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 guarantees the light emission of the light emitting group K4 in charge of the fourth symbol in all the restricted modes. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage by turning off the light emitting group K4. The gaming machine 10 may limit the light emission in the order of the light emitting groups K1, K2, and K3 when the power consumption increases in the order of the light emitting groups K3, K2, and K1.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (5) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1) to (3). The gaming machine 10 can apply the restrictions shown in (5) to the effects modes instead of the restrictions shown in the effects modes (1) to (3).

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (5), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the light emitting unit by replacing the light emission data for each light emitting group (light emitting group K1, K2, K3, K4). In the non-restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 uses the light emission data of all the light emission groups as standard data. For example, in the non-restrictive mode, the effect control device 300 uses the light emission data of the light emission group K1 as the standard data S1, the light emission data of the light emission group K2 as the standard data S2, the light emission data of the light emission group K3 as the standard data S3, and the light emission group. Let the light emission data of K4 be the standard data S4.

In the weakly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 replaces the light emission data of the light emitting groups K1, K2, and K3 with the restricted data from the standard data. For example, in the weakly restricted mode, the effect control device 300 uses the light emitting data of the light emitting group K1 as the limiting data A1, the light emitting data of the light emitting group K2 as the limiting data A2, and the light emitting data of the light emitting group K3 as the limiting data A3. The effect control device 300 does not replace the light emission data of the light emission group K4, and leaves the standard data S4 as it is.

In the strongly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 replaces the light emission data of the light emitting groups K1, K2, and K3 with the restricted data from the standard data. For example, in the strong restriction mode, the effect control device 300 uses the light emission data of the light emission group K1 as the restriction data B1, the light emission data of the light emission group K2 as the restriction data B2, and the light emission data of the light emission group K3 as the restriction data B3. The effect control device 300 does not replace the light emission data of the light emission group K4, and leaves the standard data S4 as it is.

The power consumption of the light emitting unit is maximum in the non-restricted mode, and decreases in the order of the weakly restricted mode and the strongly restricted mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can limit the power consumption of the light emitting unit while flexibly limiting the mode of production, and can stably continue the gaming control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 guarantees the light emission of the light emitting group K4 in charge of the fourth symbol in all the restricted modes. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage by turning off the light emitting group K4.

As an example of the limitation of the flexible production mode, for example, since the game machine 10 can set the light emission data for each limit intensity and for each light emission group, when the error notification is performed in the light emission group K1, the warning light interval period (turns off). The average power consumption can be different by changing the period). Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress power consumption after the power is turned on while reliably performing error notification.

In any of the restricted modes, the effect control device 300 performs an operation check for each light emitting group when the power is turned on by causing at least one of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED to emit light for each light emitting group. be able to. Further, in any of the restricted modes, the effect control device 300 simultaneously or sequentially emits all of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED for each light emitting group to check the operation of each light emitting group when the power is turned on. You can do it more reliably.

The gaming machine 10 can limit the amount of light for each light emitting group, each full-color LED, each single-color LED, or each light emission timing in the light emitting unit by turning on / off the light emission, and can adjust the brightness (for example, reduce the brightness). ) Can also be used.

Next, the operation of each monochromatic LED when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of light emission timing for each restricted mode and for each monochromatic LED in the light emitting unit when the power is turned on according to the ninth embodiment.

In the non-restricted mode, the game machine 10 has a red LED (for example, a red LED (L00R)), a green LED (for example, a green LED (L00G)), and a blue LED at the timing t20 when the initialization process after the power is turned on is completed. (For example, a blue LED (L00B)) can emit light.

The gaming machine 10 has a weak restriction mode or a strong restriction mode from the timing t20 when the initialization process after the power is turned on to the timing t26 when the NTC thermistor stabilizes. In the weakly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 enables the red LED and the blue LED to emit light at the timing t20, and limits the light emission of the green LED. The gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the red LED at the timing t21, and then enables the green LED to emit light at the timing t22. The game machine 10 continues the light emission restriction of the green LED at the timing t23 until the timing t26, and then enables the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED to emit light at the timing t26. As described above, in the weakly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 limits the number of monochromatic LEDs that emit light simultaneously from the timing t20 to the timing t26 to a maximum of two.

In the strong restriction mode, the gaming machine 10 enables the red LED to emit light at the timing t20, and limits the emission of the green LED and the blue LED. The gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the red LED at the timing t21, and then enables the green LED to emit light at the timing t22. The gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the green LED at the timing t23, and then enables the blue LED to emit light at the timing t24. The gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the blue LED at the timing t25, and then enables the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED to emit light at the timing t26. As described above, the gaming machine 10 limits the number of monochromatic LEDs that simultaneously emit light between the timing t20 and the timing t26 to one in the strongly restricted mode. In the strongly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 can confirm the operation of each monochromatic LED by causing each monochromatic LED to emit light during the light emitting period of each monochromatic LED.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 is provided with a predetermined limiting period (for example, between timings t21 and t22) in order to more reliably suppress power consumption when switching the light emission limit of each monochromatic LED, but if it is not necessary. The period may be set to "0".

Next, the operation of each monochromatic LED when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of the light emission timing of the monochromatic LED for each light emitting group in the strongly restricted mode in the light emitting unit at the time of turning on the power of the ninth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 has a strongly restricted mode from the timing t30 when the initialization process after the power is turned on to the timing t36 when the NTC thermistor stabilizes. In the strongly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 enables the light emitting groups K1, K2, K3, and K4 to emit light at the timing t30 when the initialization process and the like after the power is turned on are completed. The gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of each monochromatic LED for each light emitting group.

Regarding the light emitting group K1, the gaming machine 10 enables the red LED to emit light at the timing t30, and limits the light emission of the green LED and the blue LED. After limiting the light emission of the red LED at the timing t31, the game machine 10 continues the light emission restriction of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED until the timing t36, and can emit the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED at the timing t36. To.

Regarding the light emitting group K2, the game machine 10 limits the light emission of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED at the timing t30, and continues the light emission limitation of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED until the timing t32. The gaming machine 10 enables the red LED to emit light at the timing t32, and limits the light emission of the green LED and the blue LED. After limiting the light emission of the red LED at the timing t33, the game machine 10 continues the light emission restriction of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED until the timing t36, and can emit the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED at the timing t36. To.

Regarding the light emitting group K3, the game machine 10 limits the light emission of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED at the timing t30, and continues the light emission limitation of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED until the timing t34. The gaming machine 10 enables the red LED to emit light at the timing t34, and limits the light emission of the green LED and the blue LED. After limiting the light emission of the red LED at the timing t35, the game machine 10 continues the light emission restriction of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED until the timing t36, and can emit the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED at the timing t36. To.

Regarding the light emitting group K4, the game machine 10 enables the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED to emit light at the timing t30 and continues until the timing t36, and also enables the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED to emit light after the timing t36. do.

As described above, in the strong restriction mode, the gaming machine 10 imposes no restriction on the light emitting group K4, and simultaneously emits light from the timing t30 to the timing t36 for the light emitting groups K1, K2, and K3. The number is limited to one at the maximum. As a result, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to confirm the operation of each light emitting group in a limited manner, and while ensuring the complete operation of the light emitting group K4 which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the player, the light emitting unit after the power is turned on. Power consumption can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 is provided with a predetermined limiting period (for example, between timings t31 and t32) in order to more reliably suppress power consumption when switching the light emitting limit of each light emitting group, but if it is not necessary. The period may be set to "0".

In the strong restriction mode, the gaming machine 10 limits the number of monochromatic LEDs that simultaneously emit light from timing t30 to timing t36 for the light emitting groups K1, K2, and K3 to one at the maximum, but two or more. It may be (including all). Also with this, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the light emitting unit as a whole after the power is turned on, while making it possible to confirm the operation of each light emitting group.

Although the game machine 10 is said to suppress power consumption by turning on or off each single-color LED, it may be possible to suppress power consumption by turning on each single-color LED with high brightness or low brightness. ..

Next, the effect mode for each restricted mode in the display unit will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode for each limiting strength in the display unit of the ninth embodiment.

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (1), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the display units (display devices 41a and 41b) by changing the amount of light of the backlight. In the gaming machine 10, the brightness level is set to 5 in the non-restricted mode, but the brightness level 3 is set to suppress the amount of light more than the brightness level 5 in the limited intensity "weak" (weak limited mode), and the limited intensity is "strong" (strong). In the restricted mode), the brightness level 1 is set so that the amount of light is suppressed more than the brightness level 3. Such a gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the display unit in the weakly restricted mode as compared with the non-restricted mode, and can stably continue the game control after the power is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the power consumption of the display unit in the strong limiting mode as compared with the weak limiting mode, and can continue the game control after the power is turned on more stably. The effect control device 300 can control a backlight control circuit (not shown) to adjust the amount of light.

The effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (2) defines restrictions different from the effect mode list for each limit strength shown in (1). The gaming machine 10 can apply the restrictions shown in (2) to the effects mode instead of the restrictions shown in the effect mode shown in (1).

According to the list of effect modes for each limited intensity shown in (2), the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the display unit by limiting the light emission for each light emitting group (light emitting groups K5 and K6). The light emitting group K5 is a white LED group serving as a backlight light source of the display device 41a, and the light emitting group K6 is a white LED group serving as a backlight light source of the display device 41b.

The gaming machine 10 does not limit the light emission of all the light emitting groups in the non-restricted mode. In the weakly restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the light emitting group K5 and does not limit the light emission of the light emitting group K6. The gaming machine 10 limits the light emission of the light emitting groups K5 and K6 in the strongly restricted mode.

The power consumption of the display unit is maximum in the non-restricted mode, and decreases in the order of the weakly restricted mode and the strongly restricted mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can limit the power consumption of the display unit while flexibly limiting the mode of production, and can stably continue the gaming control after the power is turned on.

The gaming machine 10 can limit the amount of light for each light emitting group, each white LED, or each light emitting timing in the display unit by turning on / off the light emitting, and also by adjusting the brightness (for example, reducing the brightness). can do.

Next, the operation of each light emitting group in the display unit when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of light emission timing for each light emitting group and for each restricted mode in the display unit when the power is turned on according to the ninth embodiment.

Although not shown, the gaming machine 10 emits light emission groups K5 and K6 at a timing t40 when the initialization process after the power is turned on is completed in a non-restrictive manner.
The gaming machine 10 has a restriction mode A or a restriction mode B from the timing t40 when the initialization process after the power is turned on to the timing t45 when the NTC thermistor stabilizes. Restriction mode A or restriction mode B is one of the restriction modes, and is a restriction mode that can be either a weak restriction mode or a strong restriction mode by relative comparison with other restriction modes.

In the restriction mode A, the gaming machine 10 emits light from the light emitting group K6 at the timing t40, and limits the light emission of the light emitting group K5. After limiting the light emission of the light emitting group K6 at the timing t41, the gaming machine 10 continues the limitation of the light emission of the light emitting groups K5 and K6 until the timing t45, and emits the light emitting groups K5 and K6 at the timing t45.

As described above, in the limiting mode A, the gaming machine 10 has the timing t40 to the timing t45 as the light emitting limiting period of the light emitting group K5, and the timing t41 to the timing t45 as the light emitting limiting period of the light emitting group K6. Here, the gaming machine 10 can provide the sound output period of the speaker group (speakers 19a1, 19a2, 19b) in the light emission limiting period of the light emitting groups K5 and K6 from the timing t41 to the timing t45. Further, the gaming machine 10 can provide a light emitting period of the light emitting group (light emitting group K1, K2, K3) in the light emitting limiting period of the light emitting groups K5 and K6 from the timing t41 to the timing t45. For example, the game machine 10 sets the sound output period of the speaker group from timing t42 to t43, avoids the sound output period of the speaker group, and sets the light emission period of the light emitting group from timing t43 to t44. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can check the operation of each effect unit after the power is turned on while reducing the power consumption after the power is turned on.

In the restriction mode B, the gaming machine 10 emits light from the light emitting group K6 at the timing t40, and limits the light emission of the light emitting group K5. The gaming machine 10 continues to emit light from the light emitting group K6, and emits light from the light emitting group K5 at the timing t45, so that the light emitting groups K5 and K6 are emitted after the timing t45.

As described above, in the restriction mode B, the gaming machine 10 sets the light emission limiting period from the timing t40 to the timing t45 as the light emission limiting period of the light emitting group K5, and does not set the light emitting limiting period for the light emitting group K6. Here, the gaming machine 10 can provide the sound output period of the speaker group (speakers 19a1, 19a2, 19b) in the light emission limiting period of the light emitting group K5 from the timing t40 to the timing t45. Further, the gaming machine 10 can provide a light emitting period of the light emitting group (light emitting group K1, K2, K3) in the light emitting limiting period of the light emitting group K5 from the timing t40 to the timing t45. For example, the game machine 10 sets the sound output period of the speaker group from timing t42 to t43, avoids the sound output period of the speaker group, and sets the light emission period of the light emitting group from timing t43 to t44. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can check the operation of each effect unit after the power is turned on while reducing the power consumption after the power is turned on. Further, since the gaming machine 10 emits light from the light emitting group K6, the display device 41b can give a notification related to the operation after the power is turned on. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player or the staff about the content of the restriction even if the production mode in the production unit is restricted.

It should be noted that the game machine 10 is for more surely suppressing the power consumption between the switching of the light emission limitation of the light emitting groups K5 and K6, the switching of the sound output of the speaker group, or the switching of the light emitting of the light emitting group. A predetermined time limit (for example, between timings t41 and t42) is provided, but the period may be set to "0" if it is not necessary.

Next, the effect mode for each restricted mode in the movable portion will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode for each limiting strength in the movable portion of the ninth embodiment.

According to the effect mode list for each limited strength, the gaming machine 10 limits the effect mode in the movable portion (movable portion A (board effect device 44a), movable portion B (board effect device 44b)). In the non-restricted mode, the gaming machine 10 does not limit the operation of all the movable parts (movable parts A and B). The gaming machine 10 limits the operation of the movable portion A and does not limit the operation of the movable portion B in the weakly restricted mode. The gaming machine 10 limits the operation of all the movable parts (movable parts A and B) in the strongly restricted mode. The gaming machine 10 can reduce the power consumption of the actuator (for example, a motor or a solenoid) by limiting the operation of the movable portion.

The power consumption of the movable portion is maximum in the non-restricted mode, and decreases in the order of the weakly restricted mode and the strongly restricted mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can limit the power consumption of the movable portion while flexibly limiting the mode of production, and can stably continue the gaming control after the power is turned on.

The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect unit and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The effect units (light emitting units L00 to L0B, light emitting units L10 to L17, light emitting units L20, L21, push button LEDs 250 to 258, display devices 41a, 41b, board effect devices 44a, 44b, speakers 19a1, 19a2, 19b, etc.) are Direct the game. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit limits the power consumption until a predetermined condition is satisfied (timer time-up, end of required effect, transition to a predetermined game state, etc.). The production unit is controlled by the production mode) corresponding to the strength.

(2) When the control unit of (1) detects the first power-on (power-on state "power failure recovery") that can return to the state before the power was cut off, the predetermined condition is satisfied (timer time is up). During that time, when the effect unit is controlled in the first restricted effect mode and a second power-on (power-on state "reset") that cannot return to the state before the power is cut off is detected, until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect unit is controlled by a second restricted effect mode different from the first restricted effect mode.

(3) The control unit of (1) does not limit the power consumption when the power is turned on is the first power on (power on state "power failure recovery") that can return to the state before the power is cut off. Controls the production unit with

(4) The effect unit of (1) includes a sound output unit capable of outputting sound, and when the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit outputs sound in a volume limiting mode in which the volume is limited until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The unit is controlled (see FIG. 150).

(5) When the control unit of (4) detects the first power-on (power-on state "power failure recovery") that can return to the state before the power is cut off, the first volume until the predetermined condition is satisfied. When a second power-on (power-on state "reset") that cannot be restored to the state before the power was cut off is detected by controlling the sound output unit with, the volume is different from the first volume until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The sound output unit is controlled at a volume of 2.

(6) The second volume of (5) is smaller than the first volume.
(7) When the control unit of (4) detects a power-on that cannot be restored to the state before the power was cut off (power-on state "reset"), the volume output by the sound output unit until the predetermined condition is satisfied. To limit.

(8) The control unit of (4) replaces the sound data to limit the volume.
(9) The control unit of (4) limits the volume by adjusting the volume.
(10) The control unit of (4) changes the volume from the first output channel in which the first volume is set to the second output channel in which the second volume different from the first volume is set. Restrict.

(11) The effect unit of (1) includes a light emitting unit, and when the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit controls the light emitting unit in a light amount limiting mode in which the light amount is limited until a predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. 153). reference).
(12) When the control unit of (11) detects the first power-on (power-on state "power failure recovery") that can return to the state before the power is cut off, the first light amount until the predetermined condition is satisfied. When a second power-on (power-on state "reset") that cannot return to the state before the power was cut off is detected by controlling the light emitting unit with, a second light amount different from the first light amount is obtained until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The light emitting part is controlled by the amount of light of.

(13) The second light amount of (12) is smaller than the first light amount.
(14) When the control unit of (11) detects a power-on that cannot be restored to the state before the power was cut off (power-on state "reset"), the amount of light output by the light-emitting unit is calculated until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Restrict.

(15) The control unit of (11) replaces the light emission mode data to limit the amount of light.
(16) The control unit of (11) limits the amount of light by adjusting the brightness.
(17) The light emitting unit of (11) is a multicolor light emitting LED (for example, light emitting) composed of two or more monochromatic light emitting LEDs (for example, a red LED (L00R), a green LED (L00G), and a blue LED (L00B)). The control unit limits the light emission of one or more monochromatic light emitting LEDs (see FIG. 158).

(18) The light emitting unit of (11) includes a variable state light emitting unit (light emitting group K4) that notifies the variable state of the variable display game, and the control unit is a light emitting unit (light emitting group K1, K2) other than the variable state light emitting unit. , K3) is restricted (see FIG. 155).

(19) The effect unit of (1) includes a display unit (display devices 41a, 41b), and when the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit displays in a brightness limiting mode in which the brightness is limited until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Control the unit (see FIG. 156).

(20) When the control unit of (19) detects the first power-on (power-on state “power failure recovery”) that can return to the state before the power is cut off, the first brightness until the predetermined condition is satisfied. When a second power-on (power-on state "reset") that cannot be restored to the state before the power was cut off is detected by controlling the display unit with, the second brightness is different from the first brightness until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The display unit is controlled by the brightness of.

(21) The second brightness of (20) is smaller than the first brightness.
(22) When the control unit of (19) detects a power-on (power-on state "reset") that cannot be restored to the state before the power was cut off, the control unit limits the brightness of the display unit until a predetermined condition is satisfied. ..

(23) The control unit of (19) limits the brightness by adjusting the brightness.
(24) The control unit of (19) limits the brightness by replacing the preset first brightness set value with a second brightness set value different from the first brightness set value.

(25) When the control unit of (4) detects that the power is turned on, the control unit limits the operation of changing the volume by the player until the predetermined condition is satisfied (power consumption limiting process at power on [step D145]).

(26) When the control unit of (13) or (20) detects that the power is turned on, the control unit limits the operation of changing the brightness by the player until the predetermined condition is satisfied (power consumption limiting process at power on [step D145]. ]).

(27) The effect unit of (1) includes a movable unit, and when the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit controls the movable unit in a movable limiting mode in which the movable amount is limited until a predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. FIG. See 158).

(28) When the control unit of (27) detects the first power-on (power-on state “power failure recovery”) that can return to the state before the power is cut off, the control unit is movable until the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the movable part is controlled by the amount and a second power-on (power-on state "reset") that cannot return to the state before the power is cut off is detected, the amount is different from the first movable amount until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The movable part is controlled by the second movable amount.

(29) The second movable amount of (27) is smaller than the first movable amount.
(30) When the control unit of (27) detects a power-on (power-on state “reset”) that cannot be restored to the state before the power was cut off, the control unit limits the amount of movement of the movable part until a predetermined condition is satisfied. do.

(31) The gaming machine 10 has a light emitting unit (for example, a red LED (L00R), a green LED (L00G), and a blue LED (L00B)) and a first light emitting mode (for example, an unrestricted mode) in the first control state. ) Is provided with a control unit for controlling light emission. When the control unit is in the first control state at the time of detecting the power-on, the control unit changes the light emitting mode in the light emitting unit to the second light emitting mode in which the power consumption is suppressed as compared with the first light emitting mode. Change to a mode (for example, a weakly restricted mode or a strongly restricted mode) (see FIG. 154).

(32) The gaming machine 10 includes a first group light emitting unit (for example, light emitting group K1), a second group light emitting unit (for example, light emitting group K2), and a control unit. The first group light emitting unit includes two or more multicolor light emitting units composed of two or more monochromatic light emitting units. The second group light emitting unit includes two or more multicolor light emitting units composed of two or more monochromatic light emitting units. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit turns on all the monochromatic light emitting units included in the first group light emitting unit and turns off all the monochromatic light emitting units included in the second group light emitting unit until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The first control state for turning on the first control state and the second control state for turning on all the monochromatic light emitting parts included in the second group light emitting part and turning off all the monochromatic light emitting parts included in the first group light emitting part are exclusively used. Control (see FIGS. 153 and 155).

(33) The control unit of (32) reduces the brightness of the monochromatic light emitting unit included in the first group light emitting unit controlled in the first control state, and the second group light emitting unit controlled in the second control state. The brightness of the included monochromatic light emitting unit is reduced (see FIG. 155).

(34) The gaming machine 10 includes a first group light emitting unit (for example, light emitting group K1), a second group light emitting unit (for example, light emitting group K2), and a control unit. The first group light emitting unit includes two or more multicolor light emitting units composed of two or more monochromatic light emitting units. The second group light emitting unit includes two or more multicolor light emitting units composed of two or more monochromatic light emitting units. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit lights all the monochromatic light emitting units included in the first group light emitting unit until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the brightness of all the monochromatic light emitting units included in the second group light emitting unit. A first control state for reducing the brightness of all the monochromatic light emitting units included in the second group light emitting unit and a second control state for reducing the brightness of all the monochromatic light emitting units included in the first group light emitting unit. , Exclusively controlled (see FIGS. 153 and 155).

(35) The gaming machine 10 includes a first sound output unit (for example, an upper left speaker), a second sound output unit (for example, an upper right speaker), and a control unit. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the first control state (for example, timing t6) causes the first sound output unit to output sound and limits the sound output by the second sound output unit (for example, timing t6). For example, the timing t0 to the timing t1) and the second control state (for example, the timing t2 to the timing t3) in which the sound is output from the second sound output unit and the sound output by the first sound output unit is restricted are exclusively set. Control (see, for example, the weak or strong mode of FIG. 151).

(36) The gaming machine 10 includes a group light emitting unit and a control unit. The group light emitting unit includes two or more multicolor light emitting units composed of two or more monochromatic light emitting units. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, for all the multicolor light emitting units included in the group light emitting unit, the single color light emitting unit is turned on at least once while limiting the number of simultaneous lighting of the monochromatic light emitting units until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Turn on (see FIG. 153).

(37) The gaming machine 10 includes a group light emitting unit and a control unit. The group light emitting unit includes two or more multicolor light emitting units composed of two or more monochromatic light emitting units. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, all the multicolor light emitting units included in the group light emitting unit are set to 1 while limiting the number of simultaneous lighting of the monochromatic light emitting units until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Turn on more than once (see FIG. 153).

(38) The gaming machine 10 includes a sound output unit, a light emitting unit, a first display unit, a second display unit, and a control unit. The second display unit consumes less power than the first display unit. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the sound output unit limits the sound output by the sound output unit, turns off the light emitting unit and the first display unit, and turns on the second display unit. In the second control state of outputting, turning on the light emitting unit, turning off the first display unit and the second display unit, limiting the sound output by the sound output unit, turning off the light emitting unit, turning off the first display unit, the first 2 Lighting the display unit After sequentially switching to the third control state, the first display unit is turned on (see FIG. 157).

(39) The gaming machine 10 includes a sound output unit and a control unit. The sound output unit can output sound independently of the first channel and the second channel. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit outputs the sound from either the first channel or the second channel, and outputs the sound from both the first channel and the second channel after a lapse of a predetermined time. Control (see FIG. 150 (3)).

(40) The gaming machine 10 includes a multicolor light emitting unit and a control unit. The multicolor light emitting unit includes a first monochromatic light emitting unit capable of emitting light with a first light emitting color and a second monochromatic light emitting unit capable of emitting light with a second light emitting color different from the first light emitting color. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit sets the first control state in which the first monochromatic light emitting unit is turned on and the second monochromatic light emitting unit is turned off and the second monochromatic light emitting unit is turned off until the predetermined condition is satisfied. The second control state of turning on the light and turning off the first monochromatic light emitting unit is exclusively controlled (see FIGS. 153 and 155).

(41) The gaming machine 10 includes a multicolor light emitting unit and a control unit. The multicolor light emitting unit includes a first monochromatic light emitting unit capable of emitting light with a first light emitting color and a second monochromatic light emitting unit capable of emitting light with a second light emitting color different from the first light emitting color. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit has a first control state in which the first monochromatic light emitting unit is lit with a higher brightness than the second monochromatic light emitting unit and a second monochromatic light emitting unit until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is exclusively controlled from the second control state in which the light is lit with a higher brightness than that of the first monochromatic light emitting unit (see FIGS. 153 and 155).

(42) The gaming machine 10 includes a multicolor light emitting unit and a control unit. The multicolor light emitting unit includes two or more monochromatic light emitting units. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit lights the multicolor light emitting unit one or more times while limiting the number of simultaneous lightings of the single color light emitting unit until the predetermined condition is satisfied (see FIG. 154).

[10th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. When the operator intends to initialize the RAM 111C or the like of the game control device 100, the gaming machine 10 turns on the power switch while turning on the RAM clear switch 112 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 400. It is necessary (see Fig. 3). The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment has a structure in which a malicious third party cannot easily initialize the RAM 111C or the like of the gaming control device 100.

First, the operating environment of the power switch and the initialization switch in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment.
The illustrated gaming machine 10 shows a state in which the front frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The game machine 10 has an outer frame 11 fixed to a game hall facility generally called an island, and a front frame 12 is opened so that maintenance work can be performed by a staff member of the game hall. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 is excellent in maintenance workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11. In particular, in recent game machines, the front frame 12 is used as a playground equipment because the amount of protrusion of the front side components of the front frame 12 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1)) is large. (For example, a call lamp, a card unit, etc.) may interfere with each other to limit the amount of opening of the front frame 12.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 on the back surface side of the game board 30. The game control device 100 includes a game control board 650 that is housed in a board box with an initialization switch facing it. The effect control device 300 includes an effect control board 651 housed in a board box. The power supply device 400 includes a power supply control board 652 that is housed in a board box facing the power switch. Further, the front frame 12 includes various substrates 653, 654 facing the back surface side from the front frame (main body frame) 12. The various boards 653,654 are a control board (for example, a payout control board), a relay board (for example, a relay board 70), and other boards (for example, an LED board and a sensor board). The gaming machine 10 electrically connects the gaming control board 650, the effect control board 651, the power supply control board 652, and various boards 651,654 with harnesses (not shown).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 is capable of performing maintenance work by a staff member by opening the front frame 12. Normally, the staff of the amusement park opens the front frame 12 widely to secure a sufficient working environment, and then initializes the RAM 111C and the like. On the other hand, a malicious third party slightly opens the front frame 12 to secure the minimum working environment, and then initializes the RAM 111C or the like as a fraudulent act. Such a minimum working environment is often a working environment that can be operated with one hand. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has a structure that makes it difficult to perform one-handed operation for initialization of the RAM 111C or the like. On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 does not have a structure that makes it difficult to perform two-handed operation of initialization of the RAM 111C or the like, the operation of the staff of the gaming hall by widening the front frame 12 to secure a sufficient working environment. Does not damage sex.

Next, a structure that makes it difficult to perform one-handed operation for initialization of the RAM 111C and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of the power switch and the initialization switch of the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment.

The game control board 650 includes a RAM clear switch (initialization switch) 112 and a board cover 662. The RAM clear switch 112 is a push switch and can be pressed at a position not covered by the board cover 662.

The power control board 652 includes a power switch 660 and a board cover 664. The power switch 660 is a switch having a seesaw structure, and the power can be operated (ON and OFF) at a position not covered by the board cover 664. Further, the power switch 660 turns on the power when the seesaw is tilted to one side, and turns off the power when the seesaw is tilted to the other side. One side that turns on the power is located on the side farther from the RAM clear switch 112 than the other side that turns off the power. This makes it more difficult for the gaming machine 10 to turn on the power switch 660 at the same time as pressing the RAM clear switch 112 than to turn off the power switch 660 at the same time as pressing the RAM clear switch 112. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to perform an illegal initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like. Desirably, in the gaming machine 10, the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 is set to a distance L3 (for example, 25 cm) in which it is difficult to turn on the power switch 660 at the same time as pressing the RAM clear switch 112. It is desirable to do. The distance L3 is realized by having the distance L1 in the left-right direction and the distance L2 in the vertical direction between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660.

Further, the gaming machine 10 arranges the power switch 660, which requires a stronger operating force than the RAM clear switch 112, below the RAM clear switch 112. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to perform an illegal initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like even when the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 cannot be sufficiently secured.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the front frame 12 is viewed from the back surface, the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 are arranged so as to line up downward to the right. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs the ON operation of the power switch 660 at the same time as the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 112 performed by a malicious third party by turning the hand toward the back side of the front frame 12 with the RAM clear switch 112. It is more difficult than the arrangement where the power switch 660 and the power switch 660 are lined up downward to the left.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, by arranging the board cover 662 and / or the board cover 664 between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660, the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 is sufficient. Even if it cannot be secured, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an illegal initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like.

Further, the gaming machine 10 arranges an obstacle 663 between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660, which prevents the power switch 660 from being turned on at the same time as the RAM clear switch 112 is pressed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to perform an illegal initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like even when the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 cannot be sufficiently secured. The obstacle 663 may be an upright wall or the like, or may be a harness, another substrate, a control device, or the like.

Although the gaming machine 10 is provided with the RAM clear switch 112 on the game control board 650, it may be provided on other boards such as the payout control board included in the payout control device 200.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent a malicious third party from performing the initialization operation with one hand. On the other hand, the game hall staff can easily perform the initialization operation using both hands because the operation environment for the initialization operation is sufficient.

Next, the position guidance of the RAM clear switch 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of position guidance of the initialization switch of the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 is in the vicinity of the power switch 660 included in the power control board 652, and has a guide display 690 on the board cover 664. The guidance display 690 indicates the position (direction) of the RAM clear switch (initialization switch) 112. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the position of the RAM clear switch 112 to an operator who knows the position of the power switch 660 in the initialization operation but does not know the position of the RAM clear switch 112.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 112 included in the gaming control board 650, and the board cover 662 is provided with a guidance display 691. The guidance display 691 indicates the position (direction) of the power switch 660. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the position of the power switch 660 to an operator who knows the position of the RAM clear switch 112 in the initialization operation but does not know the position of the power switch 660.

Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a RAM clear switch 112 in the vicinity of the inspection connector 670 included in the gaming control board 650. The inspection connector 670 has an appearance that can be easily found when the front frame 12 is viewed from the back surface in order to facilitate inspection. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can easily confirm the position of the RAM clear switch 112 using the inspection connector 670 as a clue.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 has the power switch 660 and the power switch 660 even if the positions of the power switch 660 and the RAM clear switch 112 are separated from each other, or even if there is an operator who is unfamiliar with the positions of the power switch 660 and the RAM clear switch 112. The position of the RAM clear switch 112 can be easily grasped.

Next, another example of a structure that makes it difficult to perform one-handed operation for initialization of the RAM 111C or the like will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of a power switch and an initialization switch of the gaming machine of the first modification of the tenth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 arranges the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 apart by a distance L21 in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. Further, in the game machine 10, the OFF operation unit of the power switch 660 and the RAM clear switch 112 are arranged so as to be separated from each other by a distance L22 smaller than the distance L21 in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. In the game machine 10, the ON operation unit of the power switch 660 and the RAM clear switch 112 are arranged so as to be separated from each other by a distance L23 larger than the distance L21 in the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Further, the gaming machine 10 arranges the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 apart by a distance L41 in the depth direction when the front frame 12 is desired from the back surface. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to perform an illegal initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like even when the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 cannot be sufficiently secured.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is provided with an obstacle 663 between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660, so that the operator can perform an initialization operation over a distance obtained by adding the distance L42 in addition to the distance L41 in the depth direction. Can be forced into.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent a malicious third party from performing the initialization operation with one hand. On the other hand, the game hall staff can easily perform the initialization operation using both hands because the operation environment for the initialization operation is sufficient.

Next, another example of a structure that makes it difficult to perform one-handed operation for initialization of the RAM 111C or the like will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of the power switch and the initialization switch of the gaming machine of the second modification of the tenth embodiment.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the tenth embodiment, the RAM clear switch 112 is provided on the gaming control board 650 in that the RAM clear switch (initialization switch) 112 and the power switch 660 are provided on the same power supply control board 655. It is different from the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment in which the power switch 660 is provided on the power control board 652.

The power control board 655 includes a RAM clear switch 112, a power switch 660, and a board cover 664. The power switch 660 is a switch having a seesaw structure, and the power can be operated (ON and OFF) at a position not covered by the board cover 664. Further, the power switch 660 turns on the power when the seesaw is tilted to one side, and turns off the power when the seesaw is tilted to the other side. One side that turns on the power is located on the side farther from the RAM clear switch 112 than the other side that turns off the power. This makes it more difficult for the gaming machine 10 to turn on the power switch 660 at the same time as pressing the RAM clear switch 112 than to turn off the power switch 660 at the same time as pressing the RAM clear switch 112. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to perform an illegal initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like. Desirably, in the gaming machine 10, the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 is set to a distance L3 (for example, 25 cm) in which it is difficult to turn on the power switch 660 at the same time as pressing the RAM clear switch 112. It is desirable to do. The distance L3 is realized by having the distance L1 in the left-right direction and the distance L2 in the vertical direction between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660.

Further, the gaming machine 10 arranges the power switch 660, which requires a stronger operating force than the RAM clear switch 112, below the RAM clear switch 112. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to perform an illegal initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like even when the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 cannot be sufficiently secured.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the front frame 12 is viewed from the back surface, the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 are arranged so as to line up downward to the right. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs the ON operation of the power switch 660 at the same time as the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 112 performed by a malicious third party by turning the hand toward the back side of the front frame 12 with the RAM clear switch 112. It is more difficult than the arrangement where the power switch 660 and the power switch 660 are lined up downward to the left.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is illegal even when the arrangement interval between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660 cannot be sufficiently secured by arranging the board cover 664 between the RAM clear switch 112 and the power switch 660. It is possible to make the initialization operation of the RAM 111C or the like difficult.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent a malicious third party from performing the initialization operation with one hand. On the other hand, the game hall staff can easily perform the initialization operation using both hands because the operation environment for the initialization operation is sufficient.

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, opto-magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD-ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM on which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. In addition, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 11 Outer frame 12 Front frame 30 Pachinko board

Claims (1)

The production department that directs the game and
The second of the power-on resetting the game state before the power-off and recoverable first power-on to the game state before power-off, playing state after recovery when detecting the first power-on When the effect unit is controlled and the second power-on is detected, the effect mode is set to the first restricted effect mode in which the power consumption is limited as compared with the effect mode in the gaming state before the power is cut off. A control unit that controls the effect unit in a second restricted effect mode in which power consumption is limited rather than the effect mode.
Amusement machines including.

Images